Usr Guide

PHAWorks 5
for Windows
User Guide
PrimaTech
Personal Computer Software

for
Process Hazard Analysis
Copyright
Copyright 1996-2000 by Primatech Inc. All rights reserved.

Published August 2000
Printed in the United States of America
The Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine Copyright 1993 Wintertree
Software
Inc.
Trademarks
PHAWorks is a registered trademark of Primatech Inc.

FMEA-PC, HAZOP-PC, PHA-PC, WHATIF-PC, HAZWARE and MAN-
AGE-PC are registered trademarks of Primatech Inc.
Sage and Quick Access are trademarks of Primatech Inc.
MS-DOS and Microsoft Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corp.
Table of Contents
Preface .................................................................................................................................. 17
Whats in This User Guide .............................................................................................. 18
System Requirements ....................................................................................................... 21
Presentation Conventions ................................................................................................ 22
Contacting Primatech ....................................................................................................... 23
Chapter 1 Getting Started ......................................................................................... 1-24
Whats New in PHAWorks 5 ........................................................................................ 1-26
Save Capabilities ................................................................................................. 1-26
Enhancements to Project Configuration ........................................................ 1-26
Undo/Redo Features .......................................................................................... 1-27
PHAWorks Viewer .............................................................................................. 1-27
Enhancements to Column Configuration ...................................................... 1-27
Enhancements to Column Numbering ........................................................... 1-28
Additional Numbering Enhancements ........................................................... 1-29
Revision Features ................................................................................................ 1-29
Track Worksheet Changes Features ................................................................ 1-30
Worksheet and Project Modifications ............................................................. 1-30
Project ............................................................................................................. 1-30
Project Identification .................................................................................... 1-31
Worksheet ...................................................................................................... 1-31
Report Enhancements ........................................................................................ 1-32
Report Preview Enhancements ........................................................................ 1-33
Spell Check Enhancements ............................................................................... 1-33
Hyperlinks ............................................................................................................ 1-33
Risk Ranking ........................................................................................................ 1-34
Table of Contents 3
Accelerators ......................................................................................................... 1-34
Toolbar Changes ................................................................................................. 1-34
File Maintenance ................................................................................................. 1-35
Menu Changes .................................................................................................... 1-35
Menu Additions ................................................................................................... 1-36
Configuration Data ............................................................................................ 1-36
Data Locations ................................................................................................................. 1-37
Data Stored with the Program Information .................................................. 1-37
Data Stored at the User Level ........................................................................... 1-38
Data Stored with a Project ................................................................................ 1-38
Data Stored in a Worksheet .............................................................................. 1-39
Installing PHAWorks .................................................................................................... 1-40
Stand-Alone Installation (Hard Disk Key) ..................................................... 1-40
Stand-Alone Installation (Floppy Key) ........................................................... 1-40
Network Installation (Network Key) .............................................................. 1-41
Contacting Primatech for Help .................................................................................... 1-42
PHAWorks Files .............................................................................................................. 1-43
What To Do Next ............................................................................................................ 1-44
Chapter 2 Creating an Initial PHA ......................................................................... 2-45
Determining Your Project Type .................................................................................. 2-46
Step One: Naming the New Project ........................................................................... 2-47
Step Two: Setting the Project Configuration ........................................................... 2-50
Step Three: Setting the Column Configuration ...................................................... 2-52
Moving Columns ................................................................................................. 2-53
Changing Column Relationships ..................................................................... 2-54
Adding Columns to the Worksheet ................................................................. 2-55
Deleting Columns from the Worksheet .......................................................... 2-58
Step Four: Completing the Project Protocols ........................................................... 2-59
Table of Contents 4
Understanding the Protocol Worksheet ......................................................... 2-59
Enabling the Protocols Prompter ..................................................................... 2-59
Using the Project Task Center .......................................................................... 2-60
Step Five: Entering Project Identification ................................................................ 2-61
Step Six: Entering Project Notes ................................................................................. 2-63
Step Seven: Creating the Project Team List ............................................................ 2-64
Step Eight: Creating the Drawings List ..................................................................... 2-66
Step Nine: Adding Sessions ........................................................................................ 2-68
Step Ten: Entering Nodes, Steps, Categories, Systems ........................................ 2-72
Entering Parameters ........................................................................................... 2-74
Step Eleven: Specifying Project Options .................................................................. 2-75
Defining the Banner Configuration ................................................................ 2-75
Setting a Risk Ranking Scheme ........................................................................ 2-76
Copying Information from Another Project .................................................. 2-78
Proceeding to the Worksheet ....................................................................................... 2-80
Chapter 3 Revalidating and Updating PHA Projects ......................................... 3-81
Revalidating a PHAWorks-Compatible Project ...................................................... 3-82
Completing the Project Protocols ..................................................................... 3-83
Answering the Protocol Questions .................................................................. 3-84
Type of Revalidation Project ............................................................................. 3-85
Revalidating or Updating a Project Not Compatible with PHAWorks ............. 3-87
Using the Enter Data Method .......................................................................... 3-87
Using the Revalidation Method ....................................................................... 3-88
Setting Up an Update PHA .......................................................................................... 3-90
Completing the Project Protocol ...................................................................... 3-92
The Protocol Worksheet ..................................................................................... 3-92
Setting the Project and Column Configuration ....................................................... 3-93
Column Relationships ........................................................................................ 3-95
Table of Contents 5
Entering Project Identification .................................................................................... 3-97
Entering Project Notes ................................................................................................... 3-99
Listing the Project Team ............................................................................................. 3-100
Creating the Drawings List ........................................................................................ 3-102
Adding Sessions ........................................................................................................... 3-104
Entering Nodes, Steps, Categories, Systems ......................................................... 3-108
Entering Parameters ......................................................................................... 3-109
Specifying Project Options ......................................................................................... 3-110
Defining the Banner Configuration .............................................................. 3-110
Setting a Risk Ranking Scheme ...................................................................... 3-111
Copying Information from Another Project ................................................ 3-112
Proceeding to the Worksheet ..................................................................................... 3-114
Chapter 4 PHAWorks Basics .................................................................................. 4-115
Using the PHAWorks Program Window ................................................................. 4-116
Using the Toolbar ......................................................................................................... 4-117
Dialog Box Tips ............................................................................................................. 4-118
Opening a Project ......................................................................................................... 4-119
Using the Project Task Center ........................................................................ 4-120
Choosing Worksheet Information .................................................................. 4-120
Opening Additional Project Windows .......................................................... 4-122
Using the Spreadsheet Format ................................................................. 4-123
Using the Datasheet Format .................................................................... 4-124
Using the Tree Format ............................................................................... 4-125
Navigating a Project ..................................................................................................... 4-126
Using the Quick Access Feature ..................................................................... 4-126
Using Bookmarks .............................................................................................. 4-128
Adding Bookmarks .................................................................................... 4-128
Moving Between Bookmarks .................................................................... 4-129
Table of Contents 6
Deleting Bookmarks ................................................................................... 4-129
Using Keyboard Shortcuts ......................................................................................... 4-130
Cursor Control Keys ......................................................................................... 4-130
Control Key Combinations ............................................................................. 4-131
Function Keys .................................................................................................... 4-133
Entering Data ................................................................................................................. 4-134
Typing in Worksheet Columns ....................................................................... 4-134
Indicating Special Recommendations ........................................................... 4-134
Moving Between Entries .................................................................................. 4-135
Using the Clipboard ......................................................................................... 4-136
Specifying Locations .................................................................................................... 4-137
Selecting Preferences .................................................................................................. 4-138
Setting the Exit Verification Option ............................................................... 4-138
Setting the Overwrite Option ......................................................................... 4-139
Enabling the Severity and Likelihood Definitions Pop-up ........................ 4-139
Displaying and Printing Dates Using
the Long Format ................................................................................................ 4-139
Use Sage for Automatic Deviations ............................................................... 4-139
Check if Guideword Entries Are in Guideword Lists ................................ 4-140
Showing Dialog Box Tips ................................................................................ 4-140
Confirming Drag-and-drop in Dialog Boxes ............................................... 4-140
Confirming the Change to Edit Mode .......................................................... 4-140
Enabling the Protocols Prompter ................................................................... 4-140
Saving a Project ................................................................................................. 4-140
Setting the Maximum Number of Lines for Column Names .................... 4-141
Enabling the Show Entry Note Indicator ..................................................... 4-141
Changing Font Attributes ........................................................................................... 4-142
Reformatting Text in the Worksheet .............................................................. 4-142
Table of Contents 7
Changing Font Size in Dialog Boxes ............................................................. 4-143
Printing from PHAWorks ........................................................................................... 4-144
Specifying Print Setup ...................................................................................... 4-144
Specifying Page Setup ...................................................................................... 4-144
Page Setup Items ............................................................................................... 4-145
Saving and Backing Up Projects ............................................................................... 4-147
Selecting the Timed Automatic Backup ........................................................ 4-147
Converting Projects ...................................................................................................... 4-149
Converting an Older PHAWorks Project File .............................................. 4-150
Converting an Older PHAWorks Project File in Place ........................ 4-150
Converting an Older PHAWorks Project File to a New Project File . 4-151
Converting a DOS-Based Project File ........................................................... 4-152
Getting Help ................................................................................................................... 4-153
Accessing the Technique Tutorial .................................................................. 4-153
Getting Technical Support ............................................................................... 4-153
Viewing the About Dialog Box ....................................................................... 4-153
Closing Windows and Projects .................................................................................. 4-154
Chapter 5 PHAWorks Tutorial ............................................................................... 5-155
Lesson One: Configuring New Projects .................................................................. 5-156
Lesson Two: Using the Worksheet Formats ........................................................... 5-163
Lesson Three: Using the Quick Access Feature ................................................... 5-167
Lesson Four: Creating a Quick Entry Index ........................................................... 5-168
Lesson Five: Creating a Report ................................................................................. 5-172
Reviewing What Youve Learned ............................................................................. 5-176
Chapter 6 Modifying Worksheet and Program Presentation ......................... 6-177
Switching Worksheet Formats ................................................................................... 6-178
Customizing the Worksheet ...................................................................................... 6-179
Selecting a Worksheet View ............................................................................ 6-179
Table of Contents 8
Customizing the Worksheet Views ................................................................ 6-180
Modifying Worksheet Columns ................................................................................ 6-182
Changing Column Widths .............................................................................. 6-182
Changing Column Names ............................................................................... 6-183
Changing Entry Numbering ........................................................................... 6-184
Hiding and Showing Columns in a View .................................................... 6-185
Adding Columns to the Worksheet ............................................................... 6-186
Deleting Columns from the Worksheet ........................................................ 6-189
Moving Columns ............................................................................................... 6-190
Changing Column Relationships ................................................................... 6-191
Changing the Banner Configuration ....................................................................... 6-193
Changing Banner Names ................................................................................ 6-194
Changing the Font Size in Dialog Boxes ................................................................ 6-195
Customizing the Toolbar ............................................................................................ 6-197
Adding Icons to a Toolbar ............................................................................... 6-197
Removing Icons from a Toolbar ..................................................................... 6-198
Positioning Icons in a Toolbar ......................................................................... 6-199
Moving the Toolbars ......................................................................................... 6-199
Specifying Display Setup ........................................................................................... 6-201
Selecting Fonts ................................................................................................... 6-203
Selecting Text Colors ........................................................................................ 6-204
Selecting Background Colors .......................................................................... 6-204
Chapter 7 Working with Data ................................................................................ 7-206
Editing Lists (Dialog Boxes) ....................................................................................... 7-207
Adding a New Item to a List .......................................................................... 7-208
Deleting an Item from a List ........................................................................... 7-208
Renaming an Item in a List ............................................................................. 7-208
Duplicating an Item Within a List ................................................................. 7-209
Table of Contents 9
Copying and Pasting an Item in a List ......................................................... 7-210
Moving an Item in a List .................................................................................. 7-210
Using the Banner .......................................................................................................... 7-212
Moving Between Banner and Worksheet ..................................................... 7-212
Hiding the Banner ............................................................................................ 7-213
Using the Banner to Access Worksheet Lists ............................................... 7-213
Zooming In and Out in Banner Fields .......................................................... 7-214
Hiding Banner Fields ........................................................................................ 7-215
Renaming Banner Fields .................................................................................. 7-215
Converting Banner Labels to Uppercase ...................................................... 7-215
Combining Drawings with Separators ......................................................... 7-216
Modifying Worksheet Entries ................................................................................... 7-217
Selecting Entries ................................................................................................ 7-217
Joining Entries .................................................................................................... 7-218
Splitting Entries ................................................................................................. 7-219
Inserting Entries ................................................................................................ 7-219
Deleting Entries ................................................................................................. 7-220
Copying Noncontiguous Entries .................................................................... 7-220
Searching for Text ............................................................................................. 7-221
Replacing Text in the Worksheet .................................................................... 7-222
Reformatting Text in the Worksheet .............................................................. 7-223
Entry Notes ........................................................................................................ 7-225
Adding an Entry Note ............................................................................... 7-225
Viewing an Entry Note .............................................................................. 7-225
Editing an Entry Note ................................................................................ 7-226
Using Quick Entry Lists .............................................................................................. 7-227
Configuring Quick Entry Lists ....................................................................... 7-227
Accessing Quick Entry Lists ............................................................................ 7-228
Table of Contents 10
Inserting Text from a Quick Entry List ......................................................... 7-229
Using Default Quick Entry Lists .................................................................... 7-229
Adding a Quick Entry Item to a List ............................................................. 7-230
Deleting a Quick Entry Item from a List ...................................................... 7-230
Printing Quick Entry Lists ............................................................................... 7-231
Changing the Location of the Global Quick Entry List Database ........... 7-231
Using the Quick Entry List Index .................................................................. 7-232
Enabling an Index ...................................................................................... 7-232
Adding a Section to an Index .................................................................. 7-234
Deleting a Section from an Index ............................................................ 7-234
Renaming a Section in an Index .............................................................. 7-235
Referencing Worksheet Items ................................................................................... 7-236
Creating References .......................................................................................... 7-236
Changing References ........................................................................................ 7-237
Accessing Referenced Items ............................................................................ 7-238
Typing References Manually .......................................................................... 7-238
Using Key Expressions .............................................................................. 7-239
Using Separators ........................................................................................ 7-239
Creating Revisions of Worksheets ........................................................................... 7-240
Viewing Revisions ............................................................................................. 7-242
Comparing Revisions ....................................................................................... 7-243
Deleting Old Revisions ..................................................................................... 7-244
Revisions for All Worksheets ........................................................................... 7-244
Editing the Revision Number .......................................................................... 7-245
Tracking Worksheet Changes ................................................................................... 7-247
Track Worksheet Changes ............................................................................... 7-247
Show Worksheet Changes ............................................................................... 7-247
Restart Worksheet Changes ............................................................................ 7-248
Creating Hyperlinks to Programs and Documents .............................................. 7-249
Creating Hyperlinks ......................................................................................... 7-249
Running Hyperlinks from a List .................................................................... 7-251
Editing Hyperlinks in a List ............................................................................ 7-251
Deleting Hyperlinks from a List ..................................................................... 7-251
Inserting Hyperlinks into a Worksheet ......................................................... 7-252
Running Hyperlinks from a Worksheet ........................................................ 7-253
Editing Hyperlinks in a Worksheet ................................................................ 7-253
Deleting Hyperlinks from a Worksheet ........................................................ 7-254
Chapter 8 Changing Project Information ............................................................ 8-255
Passwords ....................................................................................................................... 8-256
Enabling Password Protection ....................................................................... 8-256
Changing the Passwords ................................................................................. 8-257
Disabling Passwords ........................................................................................ 8-258
Entering Project Notes ................................................................................................. 8-259
Editing Project Identification .................................................................................... 8-260
Modifying Session Information ................................................................................ 8-262
Accessing the List of Sessions ......................................................................... 8-262
Choosing a Session for the Worksheet .......................................................... 8-262
Adding a New Session ..................................................................................... 8-263
Changing the Current Session ....................................................................... 8-264
Deleting a Session ............................................................................................. 8-264
Changing Session Details ................................................................................ 8-264
Recording Team Attendance ..........................................................................8-265
Adding Session Notes ...................................................................................... 8-266
Modifying the Project Team ...................................................................................... 8-267
Adding a Team Member .................................................................................. 8-267
Deleting a Team Member Entry ..................................................................... 8-269
Editing Team Member Information ............................................................... 8-269
Other Project Team List Functions ................................................................ 8-270
Setting the Risk Ranking ............................................................................................ 8-271
Accessing Risk Ranking ................................................................................... 8-271
Loading a Risk Ranking File ........................................................................... 8-273
Saving a Risk Ranking Scheme as a File ....................................................... 8-273
Editing the Severity and Likelihood Levels .................................................. 8-274
Adding a Severity or Likelihood Level ................................................... 8-274
Editing a Severity or Likelihood Level .................................................... 8-275
Deleting a Severity or Likelihood Definition ......................................... 8-275
Changing the Risk Grid ................................................................................... 8-275
Exporting Project Data ................................................................................................. 8-277
Specifying Export Options .............................................................................. 8-278
Selecting Export Filters ..................................................................................... 8-279
Setting Automatic Numbering .................................................................................. 8-281
Enabling References ......................................................................................... 8-282
Numbering Worksheet Entries ....................................................................... 8-282
Enabling Entry Referencing ............................................................................ 8-284
Copying Information from Other Projects ............................................................. 8-285
Using the Quick Copy Feature .................................................................................. 8-288
Chapter 9 Tools and Utilities ................................................................................. 9-290
Using the Analysis Tools ............................................................................................ 9-291
Opening an Analysis Tools Topic ................................................................... 9-291
Printing an Analysis Tools Topic .................................................................... 9-293
Selecting Text in an Analysis Tools Topic ..................................................... 9-293
Using the Sage Feature ............................................................................................... 9-295
Choosing Causes from Sage ............................................................................ 9-295
Accessing the Sage Database .......................................................................... 9-297
Special Sage Items ............................................................................................. 9-298
Modifying the Sage Database ......................................................................... 9-298
Adding a New Component or Cause ..................................................... 9-298
Deleting a Component or Cause ............................................................. 9-299
Duplicating Existing Components .......................................................... 9-299
Editing a Component or Cause ............................................................... 9-300
Finding Text in Sage ................................................................................... 9-300
Printing the Sage Database ...................................................................... 9-301
Changing the Deviation List ........................................................................... 9-301
Adding a Deviation ................................................................................... 9-302
Deleting a Deviation .................................................................................. 9-302
Editing a Deviation .................................................................................... 9-303
Setting Sage Passwords ................................................................................... 9-303
Enabling Password Protection ................................................................. 9-304
Changing the Passwords .......................................................................... 9-305
Disabling Passwords .................................................................................. 9-305
Using the HAZOP Cost Analysis Feature .............................................................. 9-306
Using the Library .......................................................................................................... 9-307
Accessing the Library ....................................................................................... 9-307
Opening a Library Topic .................................................................................. 9-308
Editing a Library Topic .............................................................................. 9-309
Printing a Library Topic ............................................................................ 9-310
Importing Text into a Library Topic ........................................................ 9-310
Exporting a Library Topic ......................................................................... 9-311
Setting Library Passwords ............................................................................... 9-312
Using File Maintenance Commands ....................................................................... 9-315
Accessing File Maintenance ............................................................................ 9-315
Copying Project Files ........................................................................................ 9-315
Moving Project Files ......................................................................................... 9-316
Renaming Project Files ..................................................................................... 9-317
Deleting Project Files ........................................................................................ 9-317
Creating a Master Team List ..................................................................................... 9-319
Accessing the Master Team List ..................................................................... 9-319
Adding Team Member Names to the Master List ....................................... 9-320
Other Master Team List Functions ................................................................ 9-321
Copying Team Member Names to the Project Team .................................. 9-322
Setting Master Team List Passwords ............................................................. 9-322
Checking Spelling ........................................................................................................ 9-326
Spell Check Functions ...................................................................................... 9-327
Spell Checking Options ................................................................................... 9-328
Customizing Accelerators .......................................................................................... 9-330
Chapter 10 Generating Reports .......................................................................... 10-332
Generating a Report .................................................................................................. 10-333
Understanding Report Types ....................................................................... 10-334
Creating Custom Reports ............................................................................. 10-336
HTML and PDF Reports ........................................................................................... 10-338
Generating an HTML/PDF Report ............................................................ 10-338
Specifying Report Layout ........................................................................................ 10-343
Specifying Cover Pages and Indexes ................................................................... 10-346
Specifying Page Setup .............................................................................................. 10-347
Understanding Report Options .............................................................................. 10-349
Worksheet Options ........................................................................................ 10-349
Action Items and Information Needs Options ......................................... 10-350
User Options ................................................................................................... 10-350
Worksheet Summary Options ...................................................................... 10-351
Session Options .............................................................................................. 10-352
Risk Statistical Options ................................................................................. 10-352
Statistical Options .......................................................................................... 10-353
Status Chart Options ..................................................................................... 10-354
Classification Options ................................................................................... 10-355
Protocol Options ............................................................................................ 10-355
Selecting Report Columns ....................................................................................... 10-356
Selecting Report Banner Contents ........................................................................ 10-359
Setting Up Report Filters ......................................................................................... 10-360
Adding Filters ................................................................................................. 10-360
Selecting Numeric Filter Values ............................................................ 10-361
Selecting Text Filter Values .................................................................... 10-362
Selecting Date Filter Values ................................................................... 10-363
Disabling Filters .............................................................................................. 10-363
Editing the Filter List ..................................................................................... 10-364
Deleting Filters ................................................................................................ 10-364
Previewing a Report .................................................................................................. 10-365
Appendix A PHAWorks Viewer ..........................................................................A-367
Appendix B Glossary .............................................................................................. B-368
Appendix C Definitions of Risk and Severity Prioritization Factors ......... C-382
Index ................................................................................................................................... 386
Preface
Welcome to PHAWorks 5 for Windows! Were certain that youll find

that this software is powerful enough to handle the most detailed PHA
study, yet easy enough for novice users to start a PHA study within
minutes.
Make sure you read this preface to find out:
whats covered in each chapter of the User Guide.
the system requirements for running PHAWorks.
the conventions used in this User Guide. (Being familiar with these
conventions makes this guide easier to use, which means you can
get to your work faster.)
how to contact Primatech for additional information or to order
additional software.
Preface 17
Whats in This User Guide
Heres what youll find in each chapter of the User Guide:
Chapter 1, Getting Started
This chapter provides information about whats new in this version of

PHAWorks, defines a PHAWorks project, and explains the relation-
ship between a project and individual worksheets. It also explains how
to set up PHAWorks on a network or single computer.
Chapter 2, Creating an Initial PHA
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for creating and set-
ting up an Initial PHA. It also explains how to configure a study to fit
your particular needs.
Chapter 3, Revalidating and Updating PHA Projects
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions that will help you pre-
pare an existing PHA for Revalidation or Update. It also explains how
to configure a study to fit your particular needs.
Chapter 4, PHAWorks Basics
This chapter provides information about basic tasks such as opening or

converting projects, entering data, navigating projects, using the clip-
board and getting additional help.
Chapter 5, PHAWorks Tutorial
This chapter helps you learn more about PHAWorks. Even if youve
used an earlier version of PHAWorks, plan to spend a few minutes
going through these useful lessons about project configuration, work-
sheet formats and more. It will help fine tune your ability to use the
program effectively while familiarizing yourself with its many new fea-
tures.
Preface 18
Chapter 6, Modifying Worksheet and Program
Presentation
This chapter explains how to switch between the Spreadsheet, Datasheet

and Tree formats. This chapter also provides information about chang-
ing the display of the worksheet, such as modifying columns and con-
figuring the banner.
Chapter 7, Working with Data
Use this chapter to find out how to edit lists, modify data in the banner
or worksheet entries, use quick entry lists, or create and modify hyper-
links and references.
Chapter 8, Changing Project Information
This chapter contains information about passwords, project notes and

session information. It also teaches you how to modify the project team
data, set risk ranking schemes, set automatic numbering and copy in-
formation between projects.
Chapter 9, Tools and Utilities
This chapter provides steps for using Analysis Tools, the Sage techni-
cal assistant, Deviations, the Library and HAZOP Cost Analysis fea-
tures. It will also help you maintain your files, edit the Master Team list
and check spelling.
Chapter 10, Generating Reports
Use this chapter as a reference when creating project reports.
Appendix A, The PHAWorks Viewer Program
This appendix describes the PHAWorks Viewer program.
Preface 19
Appendix B, Glossary
This appendix defines PHAWorks terms.
Appendix C, Formal Definitions of Risk and Severity

Prioritization Factors
This appendix provides a technical definition of how risk and severity

prioritization factors are calculated by PHAWorks.
Preface 20
System Requirements
Here are the minimum hardware requirements for PHAWorks 5:

Computer: Minimum: A personal computer with a 486
processor and 32MB of memory.
Recommended: 64MB of memory.
Operating System: Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT4 or 2000,
with Internet Explorer 3.0 or higher.
Disk Drives: At least one diskette drive and/or a CD-
ROM drive plus a hard disk.
The program requires at least 20MB of disk
space to operate.
Display: Any display adapter supported by Win-
dows.
Printer (optional): Any printer (required only for creating
printed reports) supported by Windows that
prints graphics.
Preface 21
Presentation Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions:

Bold text indicates the names of windows, dialog boxes, menus,
commands and options.
Example: Choose the File menu.
Bold text also highlights anything you type.
Example: To proceed with the copy, type Y.
The names of keys on your computer keyboard appear in PLAIN
UPPERCASE TEXT.
Example: Press ENTER.
Keys that you press in combination are separated by the + symbol.
For example CTRL+HOME means that you press the CTRL key,
and continue to press it, while you then press the HOME key.
Italic text introduces terms when they appear for the first time in the
manual. Chapter and section titles also appear in italic text.
Example: A risk ranking is an estimate of risk based on severity and
likelihood that provides an ordering by risk.
The term select means to place the highlighted cursor on an item on
the screen.
Example: Select the desired Library topic.
Typically, you select an item by clicking on it once, by moving the high-
lighted cursor with the arrow keys or by typing the first letter of the item.
The term choose means to activate a command or feature.
Example: Choose Sessions from the Worksheet menu.
To choose an item, you click it once (also called selecting it) and press
ENTER (or click OK). You can choose some items by double-clicking
them.
The illustrations of windows, dialog boxes and menus show the
program being run with Windows 98. If you are using a different
operating system, what you see on the screen may differ slightly.
This manual uses standard Windows terminology. If you are not famil-
iar with those terms, refer to your Windows documentation.
Preface 22
Contacting Primatech
Our address is:

Primatech Inc.
445 Hutchinson Ave., Suite 200
Columbus, OH 43235
Our Internet address for technical support is:
support@primatech.com
Our Internet address for software sales and product information is:
software@primatech.com
You can access our Web site for technical support by selecting Primatech
Home Page from the Help menu in PHAWorks, or by going to
www.primatech.com in your browser.
You can also contact us by calling (614) 841-9800. Our FAX number is
(614) 841-9805.
Preface 23
Chapter 1 Getting Started
1
PHAWorks 5 is a powerful Process Hazard Analysis (PHA) tool for

use with Microsoft Windows. In this version of PHAWorks you can:
complete HAZOP, What-If, FMEA, Checklist, What-If/Checklist,
RMP Hazard Review, RMP Standards Review and PrHA studies.
undo/redo recently completed tasks.
generate reports in HTML and PDF formats.
format worksheet text with italic, bold, underline, subscript or su-
perscript text attributes. You can also change the size of entry text.
save true revisions of your worksheets.
compare revisions of worksheets (either to your current worksheet
or to other old revisions).
use the Save Project As command to create new copies of your
projects.
track worksheet changes as you enter data into the worksheet.
export data in any one of three text file formats to track recommen-
dations (action items) in other programs.
create links to other programs, files or URLs (Internet/intranet
addresses) and open them directly from a worksheet.
revalidate or update existing PHA studies.
create user-defined columns.
use long file names when saving your projects.
plus much more...
Getting Started 1-24

This chapter provides a brief introduction to the power of PHAWorks,
lists new features and enhancements to the software, describes how
the software functions, and gives instructions for setting up the pro- 1
gram on either a network or an individual computer.

Whats New in PHAWorks 5
1
There are many new features and enhancements included in this ver-
sion of PHAWorks. First, the project file format itself has changed,
from a database format to a document format. The most significant
result of this change is in the way you save your work. In addition, the
column configuration capabilities have been expanded, and you will
find other modifications on the project and worksheet levels. Take some
time to review these changes. Doing so will greatly enhance your abil-
ity to work quickly and efficiently.
Save Capabilities
Changing the program format from a database to a document has af-

fected how a project is saved. Now, the way you save a project is simi-
lar to the way you save files in other document-based programs, such
as Microsoft Word.
PHAWorks 5 includes the Save Project As... command, which
makes it much easier for you to change the projects name and
where it is stored.
In previous versions of PHAWorks, a project was saved automati-
cally when you went to a new worksheet or exited the program, as
well as when you clicked on the Save command under File, clicked
on the Save icon in the toolbar or had selected the automatic save
option. In PHAWorks 5, to save a project, you must click on the
Save/Save Project As... option under File, click on the Save or
Save Project As... icons in the toolbar, or when you exit a project or
program. Any changes to a project will prompt the Save dialog
box when the project is closed or upon exiting the program.
PHAWorks includes a timed automatic backup feature that will
save a backup of a project after a user-specified number of minutes.
The backup can be in the project directory or in another specified
directory. You can disable this option or change how often a project
is backed up by going to the Backup tab under Options in the
Utilities menu. In addition, you can backup projects at any time by
clicking on the Backup Project... command in the File menu.
Enhancements to Project Configuration
PHAWorks 5 includes a confirmation dialog box that appears when

you are creating a new project. This dialog box lets you choose whether
youd like to use the default settings for the project and column con-

figurations. If you choose to use the default settings, youll bypass the
configuration dialog boxes and quickly begin your new project. If you
choose not to use the default settings, youll be taken through the regu- 1
lar project and column configuration steps as you set up your new
project.
You can delete all notes from the project by removing the checkbox
next to the required item.
NOTE:
You can save the Project Configuration as the default configura-
tion for new projects.
Undo/Redo Features
Undo/Redo features have been added to the program. The Undo fea-
ture allows you to easily correct mistaken changes, while the Redo
feature allows you to restore changes after you have used Undo. The
number of undo levels is nearly unlimited. The Undo/Redo features
are available in the Worksheet, Library and Project Notes windows.
These features can be accessed from the Edit menu, from the main
toolbar, by pressing CTRL+Z (or a user-defined accelerator key) or
from function menus.
PHAWorks Viewer
The PHAWorks Viewer is a separate program that is shipped with
PHAWorks. This program allows you to view, but not edit, any
PHAWorks project. With this program, you can view data, review
projects and use other features that dont alter any of the project infor-
mation. This way, after a project is completed, anyone in the company
can study and print out the data, etc., but not change it.
Enhancements to Column Configuration

PHAWorks 5 contains an array of new features that give you greater
flexibility in changing and customizing worksheet columns.
Columns names, widths and positions are now saved within a
project, which allows the columns to appear the same when the
project is opened by a different user or on a different computer.
You can now add new user-defined columns to a worksheet. You
can add any of the same types of columns that currently exist in
the program, except for the REF# column (because it is a unique

column that works only with the Recommendations column). This
allows you to customize your worksheet and to include multiple
techniques within the same project, if desired. 1
You can now move the locations of columns in a worksheet. When
you move a parent column, all of its children columns will move
with it. You cannot move a column to the left of its parent column,
however, because then the data could no longer be correctly dis-
played. A child column must follow (be to the right of) its parent
column so that columns information flows logically from parent
to child.
When you resize or rename a column, that column heading changes
color to indicate that youre making a change.
You can now have multiple column relationships within a project,
even for custom columns.
You can now delete columns from a worksheet. In previous ver-
sions of PHAWorks, you could opt not to use columns in a work-
sheet, but you couldnt actually delete the column from the work-
sheet.
Restore default column settings shipped with the software by click-
ing on the Default button.
You can now save default column settings for new projects.
Enhancements to Column Numbering
PHAWorks 5 contains two new features that give you greater flexibil-
ity in numbering your columns. The first allows you to give each rec-
ommendation a unique ID number.
The second allows you to customize the numbering within most of
your worksheet columns. You can:
have no numbering or have simple, cascade, or manual number-
ing.
restart numbering options now include never start over; start over
with each new worksheet; start over with eavch new category/
node/parameter/system/subsystem; start over with each new
parent column entry.
option to turn off/on automatic renumbering of worksheet entries
indicate what the first number will be in the numbering scheme.
add a prefix to the numbers.
number custom columns.

The second new feature also lets you select to have the numbering
shown in the Recommendations column, which lets you to give a
unique number to each recommendation in your PHA study. 1
If you automatically number the Recommendations column, you
can have the number show in either the Recommendations or the
REF# column.
If numbering is shown in the REF# column, however, it is not
shown in the Recommendations column. (In addition, if number-
ing is turned off in the Recommendations column, the REF# col-
umn acts like any other column.) This is also true if numbering is
turned on in the Recommendations column, but shown in the Rec-
ommendations column instead of the REF# column.
Additional Numbering Enhancements

In addition to letting you provide columns with custom numbering,
PHAWorks 5 lets you custom number Nodes, Systems, Subsystems
and Categories. You can do this by clicking the Numbering button in
these dialog boxes. As with the custom numbering for columns, you
can have automatic or manual numbering; you can indicate what the
first number will be in the numbering scheme; you can add a prefix to
the numbering; and you can indicate whether they items should keep
the same number or be automatically renumbered when the list
changes.
Revision Features
PHAWorks 5 includes a Revision feature in the Worksheet menu.

This feature allows you to start a new revision of a worksheet and
save a copy, or snapshot, of that worksheet. This allows you to
look back at the history of a project, viewing these revisions to see
what the progress had been at the point when that revision had
been saved. This feature also allows you to compare revisions to
get a better picture of how a project worksheet has changed over
time.
There is always a current revision, and you can have unlimited
numbers of old revisions. You also have the option to delete all old
revisions of a worksheet.
When you select a revision, you will have a choice to open the
revision in the same window or a different window. When in a
window, you will have a choice of moving through old revisions
(backward and forward), and between old revisions and the cur-
rent revision, with toolbar icons or menu choices. You can also see
a list of revisions or create a new revision.

The revision shows any differences between it and the current
worksheet. When an old revision is being shown, or youre com-
paring two revisions, a line above the banner indicates what is 1
being displayed. Revision entries are read-only; they cannot be
edited. You can temporarily reformat a revision, but when you
close it, any formatting changes you made will not be saved. Revi-
sions and comparisons can be printed.
The Revision for All Worksheets feature in the Project menu has
been renamed New Revision (All Worksheets) and enhanced.
The feature has the same functionality as in PHAWorks 4.1, but it
now has the expanded capability to create a revision (snapshot)
for all worksheets in addition to its previous capability to change
the date and revision number in each worksheet.
Track Worksheet Changes Features
PHAWorks 5 includes Track Worksheet Changes, Show Worksheet

Changes and Restart Change Tracking features, which have been
added to the Project menu, to accompany the new revision features.
Track Worksheet Changes will track all of your changes (based on
entries you alter, add or delete) in the worksheet. After youve selected
the option to track changes, you have the option to Show Worksheet
Changes, which will indicate additions to the worksheet with a plus
sign (+) and deletions with a minus sign (-). If youve been tracking
changes, but want to start over, i.e., to track changes made from this
point but not those made before, you can choose Restart Change Track-
ing.
Worksheet and Project Modifications
Project
The following project features have changed:
The Preferences page includes an option to let you choose whether
or not you want to be prompted for Protocols when creating a new
project.
Its now possible for one user to edit a project while letting others
view it.
The Display dialog box lets you see a preview of changes you
make to text formatting (fonts, color, background, etc.).
In PHAWorks 4.1, you were prompted to indicate if PHAWorks-
compatible information was available when creating a project Re-

validation. In PHAWorks 5, you will also see this prompt when
creating a project Update.
1
The Find/Replace feature is now available in the Project Notes
window.
When you are completing a Find/Replace, and the program finds
the entry in a column not currently visible in the worksheet, it
displays that column in the worksheet.
When you choose either of the Recommendation records formats
in the Choose Export File Format dialog box (under File/Export),
you can now change the order of the exported fields by clicking on
Options. The order in which you place the fields in this dialog box
is the order in which theyll be exported.
In the banner, you can combine the listing of multiple drawings
onto one line using a defined separator between the drawings.
In project dialog boxes, you can change the size of the text in the
multiple line editors. The font size setting can be different for each
dialog box.
Project Identification
The Project Identification dialog box has been changed to a tabbed

format and has been expanded to allow for additional project informa-
tion. This dialog box now includes:
the Process tab, which provides fields for information about the
name and location of the company completing the study, the facil-
ity, the process used, the studys file name and the date.
the Description/Chemicals tab, which provides fields for infor-
mation about the process description and the chemicals used in
the process.
the Purpose/Scope/Objectives tab, which provides larger infor-
mation fields for this information than the previous version of
PHAWorks.
Worksheet
The worksheet appearance and functions have changed as follows:

Worksheet views are now saved within the project, which means
that each project has its own set of views. In the past, changing the
view for one project type (e.g., HAZOP) affected all projects of that
type.

You can now copy multiple, noncontiguous entries from a work-
sheet.
1
You can change the text format within worksheet entries in Spread-
sheet and Datasheet views by clicking on the new Format menu or
by right-clicking on an entry. You can now make the font smaller
or larger, and can add these attributes: italic, bold, underline, sub-
script and superscript. These features give you many options for
customizing format worksheets and reports, and for revalidating
projects.
When text format changes are made to worksheet entries in the
Spreadsheet or Datasheet views, those changes will now be re-
flected in the Tree view.
The Preferences page in the Options dialog box now includes an
option display, as well as print, long dates in a worksheet.
The Preferences page now includes an option to let you show the
entry notes indicator as a bitmap.
Report Enhancements
A number of changes have been made to the Reports feature:

A new Classification Report allows you to create a report based on
data in a particular column. This report uses the Individual Ac-
tion Items/Individual Information Needs report format, but al-
lows you to select which column you want to base the report on.
You can, for instance, base a report on the CAT, By, Priority, Sta-
tus, Date or S/L/R column, or even on a custom column youve
created. For example, this report allows you to create a report orga-
nized by the priority levels of the recommendations, or to do a
Cause report based on the causes categories.
In PHAWorks 5, you have the option to Include Page Count when
printing reports. This option is located on the Layout page of the
Reports dialog box. Enable this option to have page X of XX
printed automatically on each page. Please note that because they
are not numbered, the cover and index are not included in the
printed page count, but they are included in the total number of
pages when you specify pages to print or are previewing.
In the Risk Statistical Report, you can complete analysis on any
Severity column, even user-defined columns.
Print reports to HTML files to create electronic versions of reports.
In the Risk Statistical Report, values are now printed on the left
side of the grid.

Report Preview Enhancements
A number of changes have been made in the Reports Preview page: 1

Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons have replaced the + and -
buttons.
Click the left mouse button to move among the three zoom levels.
There is a Print icon that takes you to the Print dialog box.
You can now choose to see two pages of a report at the same time.
Previously, you could type the number of the page you wanted to
go to. Now, there is a combination function that allows you either
to type the page number or scroll through the page numbers until
you reach the one you want.
You can now scroll through multiple pages with the vertical scroll
bar.
In PHAWorks 5, the preview is inside the program window so
that you can more easily access other programs while previewing
a report.
Spell Check Enhancements
Several improvements have been made to the spell check capability:

When you are completing a spell check, and the program finds the
entry in a column not currently visible in the worksheet, it will
make that column appear in the worksheet. The column will have
an asterisk (*) to the left of it, indicating that it was added based on
one of these functions. You have the option of adding the column
to the current view of the worksheet, and if you choose to add it,
the asterisk will be removed.
The Added words file has been moved from the Locations page to
the Dictionaries dialog box accessed from the Spelling page of the
Options dialog box.
You can now choose to Ignore domain names; to use Auto correct;
and to set the spell check speed at Fast but less accurate, Moder-
ately fast and accurate or Slow but accurate.
Hyperlinks
When you open (double-click on) a link in PHAWorks 5, the running

application will reactivate or a new application will be started.

In addition, the Drawing Details dialog boxes have a new Link file
name field and a browse button. If your company has electronic draw-
ings, you can create a link to the drawing from within the dialog box. 1
This feature is similar to the hyperlink capability.
When you type the drawings file location into the Link file name field,
a link to that drawing will be created. If the drawing is located on a
local hard drive or LAN, on an intranet, or on the Internet, you can
create a link to the drawings URL (or intranet/Internet address).
Also, that drawing will be underlined when its displayed in the ban-
ner. You can double-click on the underlined drawing in the banner to
display the linked drawing.
Risk Ranking
Improvements have been made to the risk ranking capability:

The Risk Ranking dialog box includes a Notes field that allows
you to enter a description of the risk ranking.
The Risk Ranking dialog box now allows you to enter your own
custom values for the Severity and Likelihood (S/L) columns.
You may use up to four characters, in a combination of letters and
numerals, to define those values. When you enter a new Severity
or Likelihood, you will be prompted to indicate a value (up to four
characters, numerals and/or letters), and a description.
Accelerators
PHAWorks 5 lets you create your own, custom accelerators. You can
do this from the Accelerators page of the Options dialog box under
Utilities. You can add accelerators to any of the menu commands by
choosing a menu from the drop-down list at the top of the Accelerators
page. When youve chosen a menu, a list of functions for that menu
will appear. The program is designed with some default accelerators,
but you can change the accelerators keys for many of them. Each com-
mand can have up to two separate keyboard accelerators, so you should
be able to configure the program to meet your individual needs.
Toolbar Changes
PHAWorks 5 has multiple toolbars. Having multiple toolbars allows

you to display only specific toolbars based on where you are in
PHAWorks (e.g., the Worksheet toolbar will be displayed only when
youre in a worksheet window).

In addition, you can move the toolbars from their default position at
the top of the program window to float in the window or dock at
either side or the bottom of the window. 1
A Toolbars submenu has been added to the Utilities menu. This sub-
menu lets you turn toolbars on or off and lets you customize the tool-
bars. You can access the toolbar customization from the Toolbars sub-
menu, by going to the Options page in the Utilities menu or by right-
clicking on a toolbar and selecting Customize from its function menu.
PHAWorks 5 contains the following toolbars:
Main
Format
Project
Worksheet
Project Tree
Tools
Library
File Maintenance
The Compress/Expand Project features in File Maintenance in the

Utilities menu have been removed. They are no longer necessary now
that the program format has been changed to a document format. Any
project files you compressed in PHAWorks 4.1 will open in PHAWorks
5. If you need to compress a file, we recommend using a third-party
compression program.
You can now right-click on a project in the Open Project dialog box to
access such functions as cut, copy, paste, delete, etc.
Menu Changes
The following items have been moved or removed:

In the Utilities menu, under File Maintenance, the Compress/
Expand Project features have been removed because the program
format has been changed to a document format.
The Window menu now contains the New Worksheet Window
and Change Window Format submenus, which previously were
in the Project menu.

The Revision for All Worksheets option under the Project menu
has been renamed as New Revision (All Worksheets).
1
In the Worksheet menu, Change Column Width has been replaced
by Increase Column Width and Decrease Column Width.
Accelerators has been removed from the Help menu because
PHAWorks 5 features a custom accelerators capability.
Menu Additions
The following menu items have been added:

A Format menu has been added. It allows you to change the text
format in a worksheet entry.
A Toolbars submenu has been added to the Utilities menu.
The Project menu contains the new Track Worksheet Changes,
Show Worksheet Changes and Restart Change Tracking com-
mands.
Column Configuration has been added to the Project Task Cen-
ter.
Column Configuration has been added to the Project menu.
Undo/Redo features have been added to the Edit menu when in
the worksheet, Project Notes or Library windows.
The Save Project As... command has been added to the File menu.
A link to Primatechs Web site, called Primatech Home Page, has
been added to the Help menu.
An option to scroll through multiple revisions of a worksheet
within the same window has been added to the Revision sub-
menu in the Worksheet menu. The new Revision submenu in-
cludes such commands as Details, List, Start New Revision, Com-
pare Worksheets, Show Current, Show Previous and Show Next.
Configuration Data
When you convert projects from PHAWorks 4.1 to PHAWorks 5 (i.e.,

when you open a project created in PHAWorks 4.1 in PHAWorks 5),
all of the project data will convert. Because all personal settings are
now stored in the registry, however, they will need to be recreated.

Data Locations
1
Before you begin investigating task-specific features of the software
and the related portions of this manual, its important to understand
how the product and project information are related. There are three
levels at which information is specified:
The program level
The user level
The project level
The worksheet level
For example, the Sage technical assistance feature has a database that
is stored at the program level. This database is the same no matter
which project you have open.
Data Stored with the Program Information
PHAWorks stores the Library, Sage, Global Quick Entry lists, the Mas-
ter Team List and the Master Protocol List independent from indi-
vidual projects. This makes it convenient to have a single library of
information that you use for all of your projects. Although you can
certainly create more than one library (for example, you may wish to
have libraries containing site-specific information), this information
remains independent from a project and can be accessed regardless
which project you have open.
PHAWorks projects
Archive projects (the projects themselves, not the project names)
Backup projects (the projects themselves, not the project names)
Library
Sage
Global Quick Entry lists
Master Team List
Master Protocol List

Data Stored at the User Level
1
User information refers to those items that, once specified, remain the
same regardless which project you have open. Each user can have
different settings for these items. User information includes the follow-
ing:
Library locations and added words list
Display settings
Bookmarks
Page setup for printed items
Export settings
History locations
Default banner names
Software preferences (including spelling options, saving options
and toolbar configuration)
User-defined reports
Report settings (including filters)
Font size changes in multiline edit fields in dialog boxes
Data Stored with a Project
PHAWorks creates a single file for each project that contains all of the
project information (the file extensions vary by project technique: .hpw,
.wpw, etc.). This file includes the following information:
Session information (including the project team)
Project notes and identification
Project risk ranking
Project configuration
Banner configuration
Worksheet information
Worksheet views
Project column names, widths, positions, views and font attributes

Project banner names
Automatic numbering 1
Password information
Program/document links
List of file names for archived projects
Protocols used in the project
Lists of systems, subsystems, drawings, nodes, steps, etc.
Project Team list
Entry, worksheet and primary/secondary level notes
Formatting of text
Worksheet revisions
Data Stored in a Worksheet
Even though the lists of primary and secondary level items (e.g., nodes/
parameters or systems/subsystems) are stored at the project level, the
information regarding a specific node, system, parameter or subsystem
is stored independently at the worksheet level. This information in-
cludes all of the entries in the worksheet columns. For example:
Specific causes and consequences
Recommendations
Safeguards
Severity, likelihood and risk

Installing PHAWorks
1
The sections that follow provide instructions for setting up PHAWorks
so that it can run on your computer. The PHAWorks SETUP program
copies software files from the distribution diskettes or CD-ROM to
your computers hard disk or to a network drive. A key, or execution
authority, is required to execute the program.
Stand-Alone Installation (Hard Disk Key)
For Stand-Alone Installation using the key that resides on your hard
disk, no floppy key diskette is required to run PHAWorks 5.
All program files will be installed into the program directory on your
hard disk.
You need to run Activate or Remove Key in the PHAWorks 5
program group to activate the key. This will generate an installation
code. Contact Primatech for the unlocking code.
You can remove the key, however, once the key is removed, you need
to contact Primatech for a new unlocking code to reactivate the key.
You do not have to uninstall the software to remove the key.
When you remove the key, two uninstall codes will be generated.
You must provide these codes, the PHAWorks 5 serial number and
your companys name to receive a new unlocking code.
Stand-Alone Installation (Floppy Key)
For Stand-Alone Installation using the floppy key diskette, the diskette
is required to run the software.
All program files will be installed into the program directory on your
hard disk.
When installing PHAWorks 5 using a floppy key diskette to run the
program, the key cannot be transferred from the floppy diskette to the
hard disk. No unlocking code is required.

Network Installation (Network Key)
1
For Network Installation using the key residing in a directory on the
network drive, no floppy key diskette is required to run PHAWorks 5.
All program files will be copied into a program directory on a network
drive with the required workstation installation files.
The key resides on the network drive, and the location of the key
cannot be changed.
Users must have read and write access to the program directory to run
PHAWorks 5.
Each user needs to run PHA5WS.EXE to set up PHAWorks 5 on their
local workstation. This file is located in the program directory.
The process to activate or remove the key works the same as in the
Stand-Alone Installation using the key residing on your hard disk
listed above.

Contacting Primatech for Help
1
If you need to contact Primatech for any reason, help is available from
the following sources:
Problems can be solved by calling Primatech Technical Support at
(614) 841-9800.
Problems may be faxed to Primatech Technical Support at (614)
841-9805. Be sure to include a means for us to contact you.
You can reach Primatech on the Web at: www.primatech.com.
You can reach Primatech via e-mail at:
For software information: software@primatech.com

For technical support: support@primatech.com
You can also access the above information under Contacting
Primatech... in the Help menu.
To help us serve you better, please have the following information

available when you contact us:
The products name, serial number and version number located in
the About dialog box accessed from the Help menu.
The detailed steps necessary to reproduce the problem.
Your operating system.
In some cases, you might be asked to provide a data file that dem-
onstrates the problem.

PHAWorks Files
1
This section describes the PHAWorks files created by PHAWorks and
copied into the the <program\data> directory.
The following files are copied to the <program>\data directory:

File Description
PHAWSAGE.DAT A modifiable Sage technical assistance data-
base
EXAMPLE.HPW The example project for HAZOP studies
EXAMPLE.WPW The example project for What-If studies
PHAWORKS.TLX PHAWorks added words file for spell checker
ACCENT.TLX A spell checker user dictionary file
CORRECT.TLX A spell checker user dictionary file
DEFAULT.RR Default risk ranking
PHAWorks creates the following files:

File Description
project.hpw HAZOP project files
project.wpw What-If project files
project.lpw What-If/Checklist project files
project.fpw FMEA project files
project.cpw Checklist project files
project.rpw RMP (Process Hazard Review) project files
project.spw RMP (Process Standards Review) project files
project.ppw Preliminary Hazard Analysis project files
PHAWLIB.DAT Library database
PTTEAM.TDB Master team list database
QENTRY.DAT Global Quick Entry database
*.RR Risk ranking files
*.INI INI files

What To Do Next
1
If you have already set up PHAWorks (or if PHAWorks has been set up
for you by your network administrator), you can now:
begin creating an Initial project by following the steps in Chapter
2, Creating an Initial PHA.
or
begin creating a Revalidation or Update PHA by following the
steps in Chapter 3, Revalidating and Updating PHA Projects.
or
review the information in Chapter 4, PHAWorks Basics.
or
learn more about the program by completing the lessons in Chap-
ter 5, PHAWorks Tutorial.

Chapter 2 Creating an
2
Initial PHA
When you begin a PHA project, you must enter information regarding:
the PHA project method.
the nature of the study (what nodes or systems youre reviewing).
While you dont need to complete all lists and decide on every option
before you begin your first session, its a good idea to complete as
much of this new project information as you can before the team meets
for the first time.
This chapter focuses on the process of creating a new project, and
provides information about what youll need to set up before you be-
gin your study. To help you get to work as quickly as possible, you
may be instructed to select the default values for a given dialog box.
The dialog boxes you see may vary slightly, depending on the tech-
nique you have chosen to use.
These instructions assume that youve already started PHAWorks. If
you havent already started the program, do so now.
Creating an Initial PHA 2-45

Determining Your Project Type
2
Before you begin your project, you must first determine the type of
PHA you will conduct. PHAWorks 5 offers you three choices:
Initial PHA
Revalidation PHA
Update PHA
If you are conducting a study on a process for the first time, choose
Initial PHA. This chapter leads you through the steps you follow to set
up and begin an Initial PHA. To begin setting up an Initial PHA, turn
to Step One: Naming the New Project in this chapter.
If you are revalidating an existing PHA study to satisfy regulatory
requirements, choose Revalidation PHA. Turn to Chapter 3, Revalidat-
ing and Updating PHA Projects.
If you are updating an existing PHA study, choose Update PHA. Turn
to Chapter 3, Revalidating and Updating PHA Projects.

Step One: Naming the New Project
2
When you set up a new project, you are asked to select the PHA project
type, and prompted for information about the name and directory for
the project. This section walks you through this process. Follow these
steps:
1. Choose Create PHA from the File menu.
2. Choose Initial PHA.
NOTE:
To conduct a Revalidation PHA or Update an existing PHA turn
to Chapter 3: Revalidating and Updating PHA Projects.
The PHA Project Method dialog box appears:
3. Select HAZOP (Traditional Study) and click OK. Remember, after

you create the project you cannot change the project method.
NOTE:
The Project Method you select will determine the extension
attached to the project name.

Below is a list of the project name extensions you may encounter:
Project Type Extension 2
HAZOP (Traditional) .HPW
HAZOP (Procedural) .HPW
What-If .WPW
What-If/Checklist .LPW
FMEA .FPW
Checklist .CPW
RMP Hazard Review .RPW
RMP Standards Review .SPW
Preliminary Hazard Analysis .PPW
NOTE:
Archive files have an extension of .PWA
The Create New Project dialog box appears:
4. Select the directory (folder) for your project from the Save in: box,
and type a project name (MyProject, for example) in the File name
text box. Use a name that clearly identifies the study and distin-
guishes it from all others.
5. After you complete this information, press ENTER or click Pro-
ceed.
PHAWorks 5 gives you the option of simplifying the process of creat-
ing a new project by using the programs default settings for project
and column configurations. After you click Proceed, a confirmation
dialog box appears, asking whether you want to use the default set-
tings for project and column configuration:

2
If you want to review or modify the default settings for project and
column configurations, click No and proceed to Step Two: Setting the
Project Configuration.
NOTE:
In PHAWorks 5, you can the change the project and column
configuration in a project and choose to save the new configura-
tion as the default setting for all new projects. If you do this, when
you create a new project and choose to accept the default settings
for project and column configurations, these configuration settings
will then be new default settings, not the programs original
default settings.
If you wish to use the default settings for project and column configu-
rations, click Yes, and proceed to Step Four: Completing the Project Pro-
tocols.

Step Two: Setting the Project
Configuration 2
The Project Configuration dialog boxes contain several items that af-
fect important aspects of your project. The Project Configuration op-
tions you see may differ slightly from the illustration below, depend-
ing on the project method youve selected.
A variation of this Project Configuration dialog box appears:
NOTE:
If you want to save the project configuration as the default for all
new projects, select the Save as default for new projects check
box.
In the Project Configuration dialog box, follow these steps:

1. Select the check boxes or radio buttons for the configuration
options you want for your project, or accept the current settings.
In some project methods, many of the configuration options cant
be changed after data has been entered into the project, so take care
in making your selections. To help you determine if you need to
change the default configuration, this section defines each con-
figuration option.
Automatic Prompt
For HAZOP projects, you can have PHAWorks automatically
prompt you with a Guidewords or Deviations dialog box when a
worksheet is empty. Select Nothing if you dont want to be
prompted.

Breakdown of Study
For HAZOP studies, you must always divide a study facility into
nodes or steps. However, components, intentions and parameters 2
are optional. Select the check box of the items you intend to use in
the breakdown of your study.
NOTE:
Components are used with the Sage technical assistance feature.
Intentions describe what is happening under normal operating
conditions. For other project methods, studies are divided by
systems/subsystems, except for Checklist, which is divided by
systems/categories. If you choose not to use the global parameters,
you must specify an independent list of parameters for each node
in the study.
Drawing Relationship
Before you begin your study, you must specify how you intend to
use the drawings (or documents for a Checklist study) that are
part of the study documentation. In other words, you specify what
the drawings illustrate.
For HAZOP studies, drawings are related to either nodes or pa-
rameters for a traditional study, and to either steps or parameters
for a procedural study. For other studies, drawings are related to
systems or subsystems.
Use of Notes
Marking the check box for one or more of the Notes options en-
ables the notes feature. These notes are associated with individual
items and can be used to record additional information about that
item or to document a change or update in the study. You can
choose to show the presence of entry notes as a bitmap by going to
the Preferences page in the Options dialog box under the Utilities
menu.
Using Check Marks
Check marks help you keep a record of what youve completed or
reviewed in a study. Clicking the Clear button will clear all exist-
ing check marks for the project.
Using Quick Entry Lists
Quick entry lists allow you to quickly select an entry from a list
and insert it into a worksheet instead of having to type the same
entry over and over again. You may select Project-specific and
Global quick entry lists, and you may also select Different lists
for each global parameter.
2. Click Proceed to open the Column Configuration dialog box.

Step Three: Setting the Column
Configuration 2
After you set your projects configuration, the Column Configuration dia-
log box appears:
This feature lets you choose the default settings for column relationships
or set up custom relationships among the columns in your project.
Setting the column relationships is an important part of your project
configuration. PHAWorks 5 allows you to move the location of a col-
umn in a worksheet, as well as change the column relationships, even
after you enter worksheet data.
Keep in mind, however, that changing column relationships changes
the hierarchical structure of entries in a worksheet (that is, it affects the
child-parent relationship of entries across columns). Once you change
the structure, you might not be able to restore these data relationships,
even if you change the columns back to their original relationship.
When moving columns, you cannot move a column above its parent
column, and if you move a parent column, all of its child columns will
move with it.
When creating an Initial PHA, therefore, its recommended that you
select the default settings for column configuration for this example. If
you move, add or delete columns while setting up a project, for in-
stance, the rest of the steps in the project creation process may not
work as theyre described in the remainder of the chapter.

This version of PHAWorks contains features that give you greater flex-
ibility in changing and customizing worksheet columns when work-
ing with your project. For instance, you can change column widths, 2
rename columns, change entry numbering, hide columns when in dif-
ferent worksheet views, etc. For more information on modifying col-
umns once youve created a project, see Chapter 6, Modifying Worksheet
Presentation.
NOTE:
In PHAWorks 5, each project has its own worksheet views that
are saved within the project itself. Selecting items to view for one
project will not affect another project. In addition, all column
settings, including widths, names and positions, are saved within
a project.
Moving Columns
PHAWorks 5 provides you with the ability to move the location of a
column in a worksheet, as well as change the column relationships
after you enter worksheet data. The steps for this process are simple,
but because changing the relationship between columns can move
important information in a worksheet, PHAWorks gives you several
opportunities to halt the process.
CAUTION:
After you change column relationships, PHAWorks cant reverse
the association of individual entries. In other words, if you change
your mind, you can change the relationships back, but PHAWorks
wont be able to reassociate entries with the previously related
parent entries. Before you change the column relationships for
your project, we recommend that you make a backup copy of the
project.
If you choose to move a column at this stage, or to move columns after

a study has begun, follow these steps:
1. In the Column Configuration dialog box, choose the column you
wish to move.
2. Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the column
youve selected. You can also drag the column to a new location.
(If you use the drag-and-drop method, a bitmap ( ) appears if
you attempt to drop a column into an invalid location.) Keep in
mind that you cannot change column relationships by using this
method.

Changing Column Relationships
To change column relationships, you must change a columns parent.

2
To change column relationships, follow these steps:
1. In the Column Configuration dialog box, select the column whose
parent relationship you want to change.
2. Click on the Parent button.
The Choose Parent for Column dialog box appears:
An asterisk indicates the current parent column.

3. Select the new parent column.
4. Click OK.
A confirmation dialog box appears, reminding you that there are
entries, or data, in the column, and explaining that you will need
to review those entries if you proceed to change the column rela-
tionship. It also reminds you that changing the columns back to
their original relationship does not completely undo the changes
to the worksheet entries.
NOTE:
If no data has been entered into the worksheet, the confirmation
dialogs will not appear since no data is being modified.
5. If you want to continue with changing the column relationship,

click Yes. Otherwise, click No.
If you clicked Yes, a Please Note dialog box appears, stating that
entries in the column whose relationship you wished to changed
are now associated with their new parent column, rather than
their previous parent column.

6. Click OK.
If you do not have a worksheet open, you are finished with this
step.
2
If you have a worksheet open, another dialog box appears, ex-
plaining that in order to change the column relationship in the
worksheet data, all worksheet and Tree format windows will be
closed.
7. Click OK.
The worksheet closes, leaving the Column Configuration dialog
box on the screen.
8. Click OK.
When you reopen the project worksheet, the new column relation-
ships are in place.
Another way to change a columns parent is to drag-and-drop a col-
umn to associate with a new parent. For example, you can drag the
Recommendations column up until it is under the Guidewords col-
umn.
To use this method, follow these steps:
1. Drag the selected column to under its new parent and drop it.
You are prompted to Change Relationship or to Cancel.
select Change Relationship. Otherwise, click Cancel.
Follow steps 4 through 8 above.
Adding Columns to the Worksheet
PHAWorks 5 lets you add any type of column except the REF# column
to a worksheet. (The REF#, or Recommendation reference number, col-
umn provides unique information, so there can be no more than one
REF# column in a worksheet.)
As you go through the process of adding a column, each dialog box
contains tips to help you.
If you choose to add a column after starting a study, or to add columns
after a study has been created, follow these steps:
1. In the Column Configuration dialog box, select which column you
want the new column to be added under (i.e., select a Parent col-
umn for the new column).
2. Select Add Child.

The Add Child Column dialog box appears:
3. Select the type of column you want to add to the worksheet.

4. Click on Next.
You will be prompted to provide information about the Work-
sheet heading (which is the name the column displays in the
worksheet), Full name (which is the columns full name; it can be
the same as the worksheet heading or longer, to include more in-
formation), Singular references and Plural references. You must
provide a worksheet heading and full name to proceed.
5. When youve filled in this information, click on Next.

You will be prompted to provide a Column ID for the new column.
The Column ID is user-defined and alphanumeric, and it uniquely
identifies a column. You must define a column ID for any user-
created column to proceed.

2
6. When youve defined a column ID, click Next.

You will be prompted to choose a position for the new column. Do
so by clicking on the location in the column hierarchy where you
want your column to go, using the up and down arrow keys
or dragging the column to a new position.
7. When youve selected the column position, click Finish.

You will return to the Column Configuration dialog box, and you
can scroll down to view your new column, if it isnt already in
view.
NOTE:
After youve created a new column, the Column Configuration
dialog box reappears, and you can see the new column in it. If you
want to save this configuration as the default for all new projects,
select the Save as default for new projects check box.

Deleting Columns from the Worksheet
2
PHAWorks 5 lets you delete columns from a worksheet. For this ex-
ample, however, its recommended that you do not delete columns
from a worksheet when setting up an Initial PHA.
NOTE:
Some columns cannot be deleted using the column deletion feature.
You cannot delete the Guideword, Deviation, Causes and Recom-
mendations columns in HAZOP studies. Also, you cannot delete
the root (first) column or Recommendations column from any
study, nor can you delete any column that has a descendant that
cant be deleted, e.g., the Consequences column when its the parent
of the Recommendations column.
To delete a column from a worksheet, follow these steps:

1. In the Column Configuration dialog box, select which column you
want to delete.
2. Select the Delete button.
A confirmation dialog box appears:
3. Click Yes.
CAUTION:
When you delete a column, you delete all of the data in that
column. This is different from hiding a column, which simply
turns a column off, but doesnt delete the column or its data.

Step Four: Completing the Project
Protocols 2
After you set your projects configuration, the program may ask if you
would like to complete a project protocol. A protocol is a list of questions
about your project, your situation, and the process you are studying. The
Protocol format is similar in appearance to a traditional spreadsheet.
Your answers are stored with your project to provide a record of the con-
ditions under which your PHA was conducted.
The protocol type that you encounter while setting up an Initial PHA is
the Process Safety Information (PSI) Protocol. The PSI protocol will help
determine whether you have access to the safety information necessary to
complete your study.
Protocol List
This is a list of protocols available in PHAWorks.
Understanding the Protocol Worksheet

The protocol worksheet contains three columns in which you have the
option to enter information:
Column Definition
A Use this column to answer each ques-
tion yes (Y) or no (N).
Justification Enter the reason why you answered yes
or no to the question.
Comments Add any additional comments.
Enabling the Protocols Prompter

When you created a new project in PHAWorks, you were always
prompted to confirm whether or not youd like to process each proto-
col. In PHAWorks 5, you can indicate whether youd like to be prompted
to process protocols. If the option to prompt for protocols is checked
(this is the default setting), you will be prompted when you create a
new project, just as in PHAWorks. If the option to prompt for Protocols
isnt checked, the appropriate protocols will still be loaded in the project,
but you wont be prompted to process them. You can still process the
protocols by choosing Protocols... from the Project menu.

Using the Project Task Center
When you have finished processing the protocols (closed the protocol
2
window), the Project Task Center appears:
The illustration above is for a traditional HAZOP study. Other Project

Task Centers are similar in appearance but will contain different items.
The Project Task Center appears each time you open a project and
lists the information you can specify (or modify, in the case of an exist-
ing project) for your study.
The items in the Project Information area are important for planning
your study, and should probably be completed before you begin your
study.
Turn to Step Five: Identifying the Project to continue setting up your
Initial PHA.

Step Five: Entering Project
Identification 2
The Project identification item in the Project Task Center lets you
specify information such as the PHA type, the company for which you
are conducting the study, the location and description of the facility
being studied, and a more descriptive project name. The Project Iden-
tification dialog box also provides tabs for description and chemicals,
and purpose, scope and objectives.
Supplying the project identification now can help you avoid later con-
fusion with other studies. In PHAWorks 5, the Project Identification
dialog box has been expanded to a tabbed format to allow you to enter
additional information. The Project Identification dialog box now in-
cludes the Process tab; the Description/Chemicals tab, which pro-
vides fields for information about the process description and the
chemicals used in the process; and the Purpose/Scope/Objectives tab,
which provides larger information fields for this information than did
the previous version of PHAWorks.
To complete the Project identification from the Project Task Center,
follow these steps:
1. Select Project identification and click Go To..., or double-click on
Project identification.
NOTE:
All of the items in the Project Task Center are also available in the
menus.
The Project Identification dialog box appears:

2. Type any necessary information into each of the fields in each of
the tabs (Process, Description/Chemicals, Purpose/Scope/Objec-
tives) in the dialog box. 2
The File description does not replace the file name you assigned
in the Create New Project dialog box. The file description is for
further clarification of projects in PHAWorks.
3. When you have finished entering the information, click OK to
return to the Project Task Center.
Turn to Step Six: Entering Project Notes to continue setting up your
Initial PHA.

Step Six: Entering Project Notes
2
The Project notes item in the Project Task Center opens the Notes
window. You can use this feature to record information such as project
assumptions or a schedule for the project.
NOTE:
This window is for project-specific information only. Use the
Library to record information that applies to any project, such as
standard checklists, definitions of terms, abbreviations or revisions
to information found in Analysis Tools.
To enter project notes, follow these steps:

1. Select Project notes and click Go To..., or double-click on Project
notes.
The Notes window appears:
2. Type the notes for the project. When youre finished, close the
window.
or
Choose Close from the Window menu.
NOTE:
Project notes, unlike dialog boxes, can remain open while youre
working with a project worksheet.
Turn to Step Seven: Creating the Project Team to continue setting up your
Initial PHA.

Step Seven: Creating the Project
Team List 2
To add team members for a project, follow these steps:

1. Select Project team and click Go To..., or double-click on Project
team.
The Team for Project dialog box appears:
2. Click Add.
The Add Team Member dialog box appears:
3. Enter information for each field.

NOTE:
Several fields in this dialog box have drop-down history boxes.
History boxes contain information previously typed for the
2
selected field. You can select items from the history boxes rather
than retype the same information for each team member. Some
history boxes, like the Department field, have predefined lists.
4. When youre finished specifying information for the new team

member, click OK.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each member of the team.
6. To return to the Project Task Center, click OK.
Turn to Step Eight: Creating the Drawings List to continue setting up
your Initial PHA.

Step Eight: Creating the Drawings
List 2
Its a good idea to create the drawings list before you enter the nodes,
steps, systems, etc.
NOTE:
If you are creating a checklist study, you create a Documents list
instead of a Drawings list. Substitute documents for drawings in
the steps below.
To create this list, follow these steps:

1. Select Drawings from the Project Task Center and click Go To...,
or double-click on Drawings.
The Drawings dialog box appears:
NOTE:
You can hide or reveal the editing function buttons in many
dialog boxes by clicking << or >>. You may also prefer to use the
dialog box function menu, which is accessed by pointing the
mouse cursor on the dialog box and clicking the right mouse
button.
2. Click the Add button.

The Add Drawing dialog box appears:

2
3. Type the name or number of the drawing in the Drawing field. If

you want to include more information about the drawing, type
that information in the Description field. You can also create a
hyperlink to the drawing so that you can view it on your com-
puter.
4. When you have finished adding a drawing, click OK.
5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each drawing or choose Add Many from
the function menu (which is accessed by placing the cursor on the
dialog box and clicking the right mouse button).
NOTE:
The function menu is available in most dialog boxes for quick
access to required functions.
6. When youre done entering the drawings, click OK to return to the

Project Task Center.
After you finish entering the drawings, you may find it useful to
print the list youve compiled. To do this, click the Print button in
the Drawings dialog box.
For more information about adding, deleting, renaming, or moving
items in the list, refer to Chapter 7, Working with Data.
Turn to Step Nine: Adding Sessions to continue setting up your Initial
PHA.

Step Nine: Adding Sessions
2
You may already know how many sessions you plan to hold for your
study. If so, enter these dates in the Sessions dialog box. A session is
defined as a meeting, and can span a few hours or several days. For
example, you may schedule two sessions per day, each lasting 23
hours.
The Sessions dialog box also lets you identify the members of the
projects study team, note who will be present for individual sessions
and enter comments about each session.
PHAWorks waits to associate a session with a worksheet until there is
additional data in the worksheet (worksheet entries). In addition, if
you proceed into a worksheet, and the date of the current session is
different from the current date, PHAWorks will prompt you to confirm
that this is the session you wish to be working in. When you add a
session in the Sessions dialog box, you have the option of copying the
attendance from the current session instead of retyping the informa-
tion.
To enter session information, follow these steps:
1. Select Sessions from the Project Task Center, and click Go To...,
or double-click on Sessions.
The Sessions dialog box appears (showing the List page):
2. Click Add.
The Add Session dialog box appears:

2
3. Type the Date, Time and Duration and click OK. Enter times and
dates using the formats you have selected in the Regional Settings
Applet in the Windows Control Panel. In Duration, type the num-
ber of hours and minutes (hr:mn) you plan to spend in this session.
NOTE:
The hr:mn format is important in the Time and Duration fields.
In the Time field, for instance, if you type in 2, an invalid
session time message appears. Also, if you dont type in PM,
the program will list the time as AM. Duration displays the
session lengths that are not even numbers exactly as they are
typed. For instance, if you type in 2, the program correctly
understands it as 2:00 hours. But if you type in 135, meaning
one hour and 35 minutes, the program understands it as 135
hours. You must type 1:35.
A new session appears in the list:
When you add a new session, PHAWorks automatically gives it a

session number and, by default, makes it the current session. The
list of sessions is numbered and sorted chronologically.
For more information about adding, deleting or editing session infor-
mation, refer to the section entitled Modifying Session Information in
Chapter 8, Changing Project Information.

To specify team information for a session, follow these steps:
1. Click the Team tab at the top of the window.
2
The Team page of the dialog box appears:
If you added team members to the Project Team list, they appear
here if the Show all option is checked. Deselecting Show all will
show only attendees for the current session.
2. If you want to add a new team member, click Add. If you want to
change team member information, select the member and click
Details.
The Add Team Member or Team Member Details dialog box
appears.
4. If you wish this team member to appear in the Master Team List,
select Update master list.
5. At the bottom of this dialog box, you can specify if the team mem-
ber will attend a selected session by selecting Present. You can
also indicate if the member is the Leader or Scribe (or both) of the
team. (A team member must be present in order to be leader or
scribe.)
6. When you have finished specifying information for the new team
member, click OK.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each member of the team.

To enter notes for a session, follow these steps:
1. Click the Notes tab at the top of the window. 2
This page of the dialog box appears:
Use this dialog box to enter any information that pertains directly
to a session, such as any milestones to be completed or special
requirements for a session.
2. When you have finished entering the session information, click
OK to return to the Project Task Center.
Turn to Step Ten: Entering Nodes, Steps and Systems to continue setting
up your Initial PHA.

Step Ten: Entering Nodes, Steps,
Categories, Systems 2
To make a study manageable and to focus the efforts of the study team,
the facility is divided into units called nodes, steps or systems.
NOTE:
For simplicity, the following steps refer to a HAZOP study that is
divided into nodes. If you are creating a procedural HAZOP
study, replace the word node with step. If you are creating
another type of study, replace the word node with system.
To create the list of nodes for your project, follow these steps:
1. Select Nodes from the Project Task Center, and click Go To..., or
double-click on Nodes.
The Nodes dialog box for the current project appears:
Since you are defining a new project, no nodes appear in the list at this
time. You can define all the nodes for your project now. You may also
add more nodes later if you wish.
2. Choose the Add button.
The Add a node dialog box appears:

2
3. Type the name for the node and press ENTER.

The new name is added to the list.
4. To add more nodes to the list, repeat steps 2 and 3. You can select
to position new nodes in the current position in the list or at the
end of the list.
If you have configured your project so that drawings are related to
nodes, you can specify which drawings relate to which nodes. Follow
these steps:
1. Select a node in the list.
2. Click the Drawings button.
3. In the Drawings list, check a drawing you wish to associate with
the selected node. Repeat this step as necessary.
4. To return to the Nodes list, click OK.
Repeat steps 1 through 4 for other nodes in the list.
If you have configured your project to use components, you can also
define that information now. Follow these steps:
1. Select a node.
2. Click the Components button, choose Components from the func-
tion menu or press ALT+O.
4. In the Components dialog box, type the Component type (or use
the drop-down list), Qualifier and ID, and click OK.
5. When youre finished, click OK to close the Components dialog
box and return to the Nodes dialog box.
6. Click OK to close Nodes dialog box.

Entering Parameters
If you are configuring a HAZOP study, but opted not to use the global
2
lists of parameters, choose a node from the Nodes list, click on the
Parameters button and type the related parameters in a Parameters
list. This list of parameters is independent for each node in the study.
If you are configuring another type of study, you might want to include
a list of subsystems associated with a system into a Subsystems list.
This list of subsystems might be different for each system in the study.
(A Checklist study uses categories instead of subsystems.)
To return to the Project Task Center, click OK.
Turn to Step Eleven: Specifying Project Options to continue setting up
your Initial PHA.

Step Eleven: Specifying Project
Options 2
The Project Task Center contains a list of Project Options that you
may wish to set before beginning your study. The contents of the win-
dow will vary depending on the type of study you are conducting.
This section provides instructions for some of the options you are most
likely to configure for a new project.
Defining the Banner Configuration
You can configure the worksheet banner to display different fields

and, in some cases, change the maximum number of lines displayed in
fields.
To modify the banner, follow these steps:
1. Select Banner Configuration from the Project Task Center and
click Go To..., or double-click on Banner Configuration.
The Banner Configuration dialog box appears:
The dialog box you see may contain different items, depending on
the project type you have selected.
2. Make sure the check box is selected for each field you wish to
include in the banner.
For those fields that can display more than one line of text, type the
maximum number of lines you wish the banner to display. (It will
never have more lines than needed.)

You may also select the option to have all drawings listed on one
line in the banner. If you select this option, a semicolon (;) is used
as the default separator between drawings. You can change the 2
separator, however, by clicking on the radio button for Combine
drawings with this between them, then entering the separator
you want to use.
3. When youre finished making your changes, click OK to return to
the Project Task Center.
Setting a Risk Ranking Scheme
A risk ranking scheme determines a risk value on the basis of the study
teams input regarding the likelihood and severity of an occurrence of
the hazard scenario. PHAWorks allows you to define the severity and
likelihood levels and the risk values.
To specify a risk ranking scheme, follow these steps:
1. Choose Project risk ranking from the Project Task Center or
double-click on Project risk ranking.
The Risk Ranking dialog box appears:
2. Make sure the Use risk ranking check box is checked.

If the current scheme is satisfactory, click OK to leave the dialog
box. Otherwise, continue with step 3 to change the current set-
tings.
3. Set the following options to reflect the ranking scheme you want to
use:
Top severity values are more serious

Lower risk values are more serious

NOTE:
These settings are used only for the Risk Statistical report. 2
4. To add Severity or Likelihood levels, select the list you wish to
edit, click the Add buttons and type the display value and descrip-
tion for the new level.
5. The Risk Ranking dialog box now allows you to enter your own
values for the Severity and Likelihood (S/L) columns. You may
use up to four characters, in a combination of letters and numer-
als, to define those values. When you enter a new Severity or Like-
lihood, the dialog box prompts you to indicate a value (up to four
characters, numerals and/or letters) and a description.
6. Click OK to close the Add S/L Definition dialog box.
7. You can enter or change information in the Notes field to provide
a description of the risk ranking file youve loaded.
8. If you want to see the risk ranking grid, click the Risk Grid button:
The Risk Grid appears:
9. Click Swap (or press ALT+S) if you want to swap the severity and
likelihood axes on the grid. (This changes only the appearance of
the grid, not the values.)
10. Enter or modify the risk ranking values by clicking on the grid
square whose value you want to change, then typing in the new
value.
11. To leave the risk ranking grid, click OK.

12. To leave the Risk Ranking dialog box and save your changes,
click OK.
If you want to exit the Risk Ranking dialog box without saving
2
any changes, click Cancel.
Copying Information from Another Project
Copying information directly from another project can save consider-

able time and effort. You can browse a list of source items for items to
be copied. This is helpful in determining what program information
you need to copy into the destination project. Follow these steps to
copy information from another project:
1. Choose Copy from other project from the Project Task Center.
PHAWorks prompts you to select a source project:
2. Choose a project and click Open.

NOTE:
Some items in this dialog box require that the project configura-
tion items be the same for both source and destination.
After you select a project, this dialog box appears:

2
3. Select the items you want to copy into the new project, and click
Copy. You can browse a list of source items for items to be copied.
This is helpful in determining what program information you need
to copy into the destination project. PHAWorks displays a mes-
sage when the copy is completed.
Some copied items replace current items, while other copied items are
appended to current items. For example, risk ranking, banner names,
guidewords, entry numbering, global parameters and quick entry lists
are replaced. Drawings, project team lists, sessions, document links,
nodes and worksheets are appended. For more information on how
data is copied, see the Copying Information from Other Projects section
in Chapter 8, Changing Project Information.

Proceeding to the Worksheet
2
To proceed to the worksheet from the Project Task Center, you specify
the worksheet format youd like to use:
Choose the Spreadsheet button to use a spreadsheet worksheet
format.
Choose the Datasheet button to use the top-down worksheet for-
mat.
Choose the Tree button to view the hierarchical representation of
the worksheet data.
The Tree format lets you view the data and navigate within the work-
sheet structure. The other formats let you enter and edit data.
When you choose one of these buttons, PHAWorks prompts you for
information for the worksheet, such as node, parameter, drawings or
guideword.
Follow these steps to open a worksheet:
1. Choose Open Project from the File menu or choose the Open
icon ( ) from the toolbar. Or, you can choose a project from the list
of recent projects under the File menu.
2. Choose a project from the Open Project dialog box.
You can select any information or options to modify from the Project
Task Center.
3. Click one of the worksheet buttons and follow the prompts for
worksheet information.
Youre now ready to begin entering information for an Initial PHA
study. If you are new to PHAWorks, you may find it useful to spend a
few minutes going through the lessons in Chapter 5: PHAWorks Tuto-
rial.
Unless you are planning to revalidate or update an existing PHA turn
to Chapter 4, PHAWorks Basics, for additional information on the basic
features of PHAWorks 4 such as opening and closing projects, moving
around the worksheet and so on.
If you are planning to revalidate or update an existing PHA turn to
Chapter 3, Revalidating and Updating PHA Projects.

Chapter 3 Revalidating
3
and Updating PHA Projects
This chapter describes the processes for revalidating or updating ex-

isting PHA projects. It provides information about what youll need to
set up before you begin your study. To help you get to work as quickly
as possible, you may be instructed to select the default values for a
given dialog box. The dialog boxes you see may be slightly different,
depending on the type of technique you have chosen to use.
Since this chapter includes all the steps necessary to revalidate or
update a PHA Project, some of the information it contains may seem
repetitious, especially if youve used Chapter 2, Creating an Initial PHA
to begin a project. If you are comfortable with the project setup process
outlined in Chapter 2, skip the sections in this chapter that detail top-
ics with which you are familiar. They are the same in both chapters.
These instructions assume that youve already started PHAWorks. If
you havent already started the program, do so now.
If you are conducting a Revalidation PHA, continue with this section
to begin setting up your project.
or
If you are conducting an Update PHA, turn to the section in this chap-
ter entitled Setting up an Update PHA to begin that type of project.
Revalidating and Updating PHA Projects 3-81

Revalidating a PHAWorks-
Compatible Project 3
To begin setting up a Revalidation PHA, follow these steps:

2. Choose Revalidation PHA.
A Revalidate PHA Study dialog box appears asking whether you
have a file that is compatible with PHAWorks.
If your answer is Yes, continue with this section. If your answer
is No, skip to the section in this chapter entitled Revalidating or
Updating a Project Not Compatible with PHAWorks.
3. Choose Yes in the Please Confirm dialog box.
The Choose Project to Revalidate dialog box appears:
4. Select the project you want to revalidate and click Open.

The Archive Information dialog box appears:

NOTE:
When you revalidate an existing PHAWorks-compatible project,
the previous version of the project is automatically assigned
3
archive status. To do this, PHAWorks renames the old project and
assigns the current name to the newer version. Each project
archive is stored with and accessible from the projects current
version.
5. Enter any applicable archive information and click OK.

A Please Confirm dialog box appears:
6. Click Yes if you want to complete the project protocols.

Turn to the next section, Completing the Project Protocols, to complete
the protocol worksheets.
Completing the Project Protocols

The Protocols are lists of questions about your project, your situation,
and the PHA you are revalidating. The Protocol format is similar in
appearance to a traditional spreadsheet. Your answers are stored to
provide a record of the conditions under which your PHA was con-
ducted. While it is not necessary to complete the protocols in order to
conduct a study, we strongly urge you to do so. The four protocols
included with PHAWorks are listed below.
NOTE:
In PHAWorks 5, you have the option to turn the Protocols
prompt off, by going to the Preferences tab in the Options dialog
box under the Utilities menu and deselecting the Prompt for
protocols option.
Process Safety Information (PSI) needed for PHA protocol

The PSI protocol will help determine whether you have the safety
information necessary to properly complete your study.
NOTE:
The PSI Protocol is the only protocol you see if you are conducting
an update PHA. A revalidation PHA includes three additional
protocols.

Information needed for Revalidation protocol
The questions in this protocol concern the results of the previous
PHA and the actions taken on those results since the study was 3
conducted.
Regulatory requirements for Revalidation protocol
This protocol will help determine whether the previous PHA met
all the applicable regulatory requirements.
Technical Requirements for Revalidation protocol
This protocol will help determine whether each of the technical
elements of the previous PHA were properly addressed.
Answering the Protocol Questions
The protocol worksheet contains four columns. The information in the

first column (the Question column) can not be changed. The other
three columns provide you with the opportunity to enter information:
Column Definition
To complete the protocols, follow these steps:

1. Type answers to the questions in the appropriate worksheet col-
umns.
2. Click the Close button to close each protocol worksheet window
as you are finished.

Type of Revalidation Project
3
When you have finished completing the protocols, you are presented
with one of several options, depending on the project you are revali-
dating and the method you are using.
Because you are revalidating a PHAWorks-compatible project, the
Specify Type of Revalidation dialog box appears:
If you are modifying an existing study, choose Revise/Retrofit.

1. Choose Revise/Retrofit.
The Project Task Center appears:
Because you are revising or retrofitting an existing project, it is not

necessary to configure your project. Skip to the section in this chap-
ter entitled Entering Project Identification to continue setting up this
type of revalidation project.
Use the Replace/Redo type of Revalidation to start over with a new
PHA.
1. Choose Replace/Redo.
The Project Method dialog box appears:

3
2. Select a Project Method. Click OK.

The Project Configuration dialog box appears.
Because you are replacing or redoing a project, you will need to
configure your new PHA. Turn to the section in this chapter en-
titled, Setting the Project Configuration to continue setting up this
type of revalidation project.
The Project Task Center pictured on the previous page is for a tradi-
tional HAZOP study. Other Project Task Centers are similar in ap-
pearance but may contain different items.
The Project Task Center also appears each time you open a project
and lists the information you can specify (or modify, in the case of an
existing project) for your study. You can also access this information
after you have opened a project by selecting Project Task Center from
the Project menu, pressing F8 or clicking on the Project Task Center
icon ( ).
The items in the Project Information area are important for planning
your study and should be completed or revised before you begin your
study, if necessary.

Revalidating or Updating a Project
Not Compatible with PHAWorks 3
To begin setting up a Revalidation PHA, follow these steps:

2. Choose Revalidation PHA.
A Please Confirm dialog box appears asking whether you have a
file that is compatible with PHAWorks.
If your answer is No, continue with this section. If your answer
is Yes turn to the section in this chapter entitled Revalidating a
PHAWorks-Compatible Project.
3. Choose No in the Please Confirm dialog box.
The Method for Proceeding dialog box appears:
2. If you plan to enter all the data before you revalidate, continue
with the next section. If you plan to revalidate while you enter
data, turn to the section entitled Using the Revalidation Method.
Using the Enter Data Method

Use this method if you want to enter data from the previous PHA into
PHAWorks before beginning to revalidate the project.
1. Choose Enter Data in the Method for Proceeding dialog box.

3

The Create a New Project dialog box appears:
3. Type a name for your project and click Proceed.

You are now ready to begin configuring this type of project. Turn to the
section in this chapter entitled Setting the Project and Column Configura-
tion to continue setting up your project.
Using the Revalidation Method
Use this method if you wish to revalidate as you enter data.

1. Choose Revalidate in the Method for Proceeding dialog box.

3

The Revalidation Project Name dialog box appears:
3. Type a name for your project. Click Proceed.

You are now ready to begin configuring this type of project. Turn to the
section in this chapter entitled Setting the Project and Column Configura-
tion to continue setting up your project.

Setting Up an Update PHA
3
If you have chosen to update an existing PHA, follow these steps to
complete the Update PHA setup process:
To set up an Update PHA, follow these steps:
2. Choose Update PHA.
A Update PHA Study dialog box appears asking whether you
have a file that is compatible with PHAWorks.
If your answer is Yes, continue with this section. If your answer
is No, skip to the section in this chapter entitled Revalidating or
Updating a Project Not Compatible with PHAWorks.
3. Choose Yes in the Please Confirm dialog box.
The Choose Project to Update dialog box appears:
4. Select the project you wish to update. Click Open.

The Archive Information dialog box appears:

3
NOTE:
When you update an existing PHAWorks-compatible project, the
previous version of the project is automatically assigned archive
status. To do this, PHAWorks renames the old project and assigns
the current name to the newer version.
5. Enter any applicable archive information. Click OK.

Turn to the next section, Completing the Project Protocol, to continue

setting up your study.

Completing the Project Protocol
3
The Protocol is a list of questions about your project, your situation,
and the PHA you are updating. The Protocol format is similar in ap-
pearance to a traditional spreadsheet. Your answers are stored in a
database to provide a record of the conditions under which your PHA
was conducted. While it is not necessary to complete the protocols in
order to conduct a study, we strongly urge you to do so.
The protocol included as part of an update PHA is the Process Safety

Information (PSI) needed for PHA protocol. The PSI protocol will help
determine whether you have the safety information necessary to prop-
erly complete your study.
NOTE:
In PHAWorks 5, you have the option to turn the Protocols
prompt off, by going to the Preferences tab in the Options dialog
box under the Utilities menu and deselecting the Prompt for
protocols option.
The Protocol Worksheet

The protocol worksheet contains four columns. The information in the
first column (the Question column) cannot be changed. The other three
columns provide you with the opportunity to enter information:
Column Definition
To complete the protocol, follow these steps:

1. Type answers to the questions in the appropriate worksheet col-
umns.
2. Click the Close button to close the protocol worksheet window as
you complete it.
You are now ready to finish setting up your project. Since you are
updating an existing study, you will not need to configure your project.
Turn to the section in this chapter entitled, Entering Project Identifica-
tion to continue setting up your Update PHA.

Setting the Project and Column
Configuration 3
The Project Configuration and Column Configuration dialog boxes

contain several items that affect important aspects of your project. The
Project Configuration options you see may differ slightly from the
illustrations below, depending on the project method youve selected.
A variation of this Project Configuration dialog box appears:
In the Project Configuration dialog box, follow these steps:

1. Select the check boxes or radio buttons for the configuration
options you want for your project.
In some project methods, many of these options cant be changed
after you leave this dialog box, so take care in making your selec-
tions. To help you determine if you need to change the default
configuration, this section defines each configuration option.
2. Click Proceed to accept the settings.
The Column Configuration dialog box will appear.
To change the column configuration, or the relationships between col-
umns, follow these steps:
1. Select the column you want to move.
2. Use the up and down arrow buttons or drag the column name
to move the selected column to the place you want it to be.

3. You can also add columns at this time, if you need to do so. To add
columns, refer to the Adding Columns to the Worksheet section in
Chapter 2, Creating an Initial PHA. 3
4. When the column configuration is defined as you wish, click Fin-
ish.
If youd like the new column configuration to become the default
configuration for new projects, select the Save as default for new
projects check box.
Automatic Prompt
For HAZOP projects, you can have PHAWorks automatically
prompt you with a Guidewords or Deviations dialog box when a
worksheet is empty. Select Nothing if you dont want to be
prompted.
Breakdown of Study
For HAZOP studies, you must always divide a study facility into
nodes or steps. However, components, intentions and parameters
are optional. Select the check box of the items you intend to use in
the breakdown of your study.
NOTE:
Components are used with the Sage technical assistance feature.
Intentions describe what is happening under normal operating
conditions. For project methods other than HAZOP, studies are
divided by systems/subsystems, except for Checklist, which is
divided by system/category. If you choose not to use the global
lists of parameters for a HAZOP study, you must specify an
independent list of parameters for each node in the study.
Drawing Relationship
Before you begin your study, you must specify how you intend to
use the drawings (or documents for a Checklist study) that are
part of the study documentation. In other words, you specify what
the drawings illustrate.
For HAZOP studies, drawings are related to either nodes or pa-
rameters for a traditional study, and to either steps or parameters
for a procedural study. For other studies, drawings are related to
systems or subsystems.
Use of Notes
Marking the check box for one or more of the Notes options en-
ables the notes feature. These notes are associated with individual
items and can be used to record additional information about that
item or to document a change or update in the study. In PHAWorks
5, you can choose to show entry notes as a bitmap by going to the

Preferences page in the Options dialog box under the Utilities
menu.
Using Check Marks 3
Check marks help you keep a record of what youve completed or
reviewed in a study. Clicking the Clear button will clear all exist-
ing check marks for the project.
Quick entry lists allow you to quickly select an entry from a list
and insert it into a worksheet instead of having to type the same
entry over and over again. You may select Project-specific and
Global quick entry lists, and you may also select Different lists
for each global parameter.
Column Relationships
Setting the column relationships is an important part of your project

configuration. In PHAWorks 5, you can add columns to a worksheet.
Changing column relationships and adding columns changes the hi-
erarchical structure of entries in a worksheet (that is, it affects the
child-parent relationship of entries across columns). When moving
columns, you cannot move a column above its parent column, and if
you move a parent column, all of its child columns will move with it.
The default column relationships are listed in the following table:
Technique Column Name Default Setting

HAZOP Consequences Causes
Safeguards Consequences
Recommendations Consequences
What-If Safeguards Consequences
What-If/Checklist Safeguards Consequences
FMEA Effects Causes
Safeguards Effects
Recommendations Effects
Checklist N/A N/A
RMP (Hazards) Consequences Causes


RMP (Standards) Stage Standard
Verification Stage
3
Recommendations Verification
PrHA Consequences Causes
CAUTION:
Once you change column relationships, PHAWorks cant reverse
project.

Entering Project Identification
3
The Project identification item in the Project Task Center lets you
specify information such as the PHA type, the company for which you
are conducting the study, the location and description of the facility
being studied, and a more descriptive project name. The Project Iden-
tification dialog box also provides fields for the projects purpose,
scope and objectives.
Supplying the project identification now can help you avoid later con-
fusion with other studies. In PHAWorks 5, the Project Identification
dialog box has been expanded to a tabbed format to allow for inclusion
of more, and additional, information. The Project Identification dialog
box now includes the Process tab; the Description/Chemicals tab, which
provides fields for information about the process description and the
chemicals used in the process; and the Purpose/Scope/Objectives tab,
which provides larger information fields for this information than the
previous version of PHAWorks.
To complete this information, follow these steps:
1. Select Project identification and click Go To.
2. Type any necessary information into each of the fields in each of

the tabs (Process, Description/Chemicals, Purpose/Scope/Objec-
tives) in the dialog box.
The project name can be longer than the filename you assigned in
the Create New Project dialog box, but it does not replace it. The
project name is for further clarification of projects in PHAWorks.

3. When you have finished entering the information, click OK to
return to the Project Task Center.
3
Turn to the next section, Entering Project Notes, to continue setting up
your project.

Entering Project Notes
3
The Project notes item in the Project Task Center opens the Notes
window. You can use this feature to record information such as project
assumptions or a schedule for the project.
NOTE:
This window is for project-specific information only. Use the
Library to record information that applies to any project, such as
standard checklists, definitions of terms, abbreviations or revisions
to the information in Analysis Tools.
To enter project notes, follow these steps:

1. Select Project notes and click Go To.
The Notes window appears:
2. Type the notes for the project. When youre finished, close the
window. (Click the Close button in the upper right-hand corner.)
or
NOTE:
The Project Notes window can remain open while you conduct
your study (unlike a dialog box).
Turn to the next section, Creating the Project Team, to continue setting
up your project.

Listing the Project Team
3
1. Select Project Team and click Go To.
The Team for Project dialog box appears:
2. Click Add.

NOTE:
Several fields in this dialog box have drop-down history boxes.
History boxes contain information previously typed for the
selected field. You can select items from the history boxes rather
than retype the entire text for each field.

member, click OK.
3
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each new member of the team.
Turn to the next section, Creating the Drawings List, to continue setting
up your project.

Creating the Drawings List
3
Its a good idea to create the drawings list before you enter the break-
down of the facility (nodes, steps, systems, etc.).
NOTE:
If you are creating a Checklist study you create a Documents list
instead of a Drawings list. In that case only, a Documents dialog
box appears. Substitute documents for drawings in the steps
below.
To create this list, follow these steps:

1. Select Drawings from the Project Task Center and click Go To.
The Drawings dialog box appears:
NOTE:
You can hide or reveal the editing function buttons in many
dialog boxes. You may also prefer to use the dialog box function
menu, which is accessed by placing the mouse cursor on the dialog
box and clicking the right mouse button.

The Add Drawing dialog box appears:

3
3. Type the name or number of the drawing in the Drawing field. If

you want to include more information about the drawing, type
that information in the Description field.
4. If you want to add the drawing to a list of links in this dialog box,
click the Details button, type a file name into the Link file name
field and click the Run button. When youre finished, click OK. A
link icon will appear before the drawing in the Drawings dialog
box, letting you show display drawings from within the dialog
box by clicking the Run Link button.
5. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 for each drawing or choose Add Many
from the function menu (which is accessed by placing the cursor
on the dialog box and clicking the right mouse button).
For more information about adding, deleting, renaming or moving
6. When youre done entering the drawings, click OK.
After you finish entering the drawings, you may find it useful to
print the list youve compiled. To do this, click the Print button in
the Drawings dialog box.
For more information about adding, deleting, renaming, or moving
Turn to the next section, Adding Sessions, to continue setting up your
study.

Adding Sessions
3
You may already know how many sessions you plan to hold for your
study. If so, enter these dates in the Sessions dialog box. A session is
defined as a meeting, and can span a few hours or several days. For
example, you may schedule two sessions per day, each lasting 23
hours.
The Sessions dialog box also lets you identify the members of the
projects study team, note who will be present for individual sessions
and enter comments about each session.
PHAWorks waits to add a session to a worksheet until there is other
data (revision or worksheet entries). In addition, if you begin entering
data into a worksheet, and the date of the current session is different
from todays date, PHAWorks will prompt you to confirm that this is
the session you wish to be working in. Finally, when you add a session
in the Sessions dialog box, you have the option of copying the atten-
dance from the current session.
To enter session information, follow these steps:
1. Select Sessions from the Project Task Center, and click Go To.
2. Click Add.

3
3. Type the Date, Time and Duration and click OK. In the Time
field, type the time (hr:mn) that the meeting will begin. In Duration,
type the number of hours and minutes (hr:mn) you plan to spend in
this session. You can also use a decimal format to enter hours and
minutes in Duration, where 4.5 becomes 4:30 (4 hours, 30 min-
utes).
NOTE:
The hr:mn format is important in the Duration field, if you
choose to use that format rather than a decimal format. When you
type 4:30 (the correct hr:mn format), PHAWorks records this as
four hours and thirty minutes.
A new session appears in the list:
When you add a new session as you just did, PHAWorks automati-
cally gives it a session number and, by default, makes it the current
session. The list of sessions is sorted chronologically.
For more information about adding, deleting or editing session infor-
mation, refer to the section entitled Modifying Session Information in

To specify team information for a session, follow these steps:
1. Click the Team tab at the top of the dialog box. 3
The Team page of the dialog box appears:
2. If you want to add a new team member, click Add. If you want to
change team member information, select the member and click
Details.
The Add Team Member or Team Member Details dialog box
appears.
4. If you wish this team member to appear in the Master Team List,
select Update master team list.
5. At the bottom of this dialog box, you can specify if the team mem-
ber will attend a selected session by selecting Present. You can
also indicate if the member is the Leader or Scribe (or both) of the
team. (A team member must be present in order to be leader or
scribe.)
member, click OK.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each new member of the team.

To enter notes for a session, follow these steps:
1. Click the Notes tab at the top of the dialog box and choose a ses- 3
sion from the drop-down list.
The Notes page of the Sessions dialog box appears:
Use this dialog box to enter any information that pertains directly
to a session, such as any milestones to be completed or special
requirements for a session.
2. When you finish typing the session notes, click OK to close the
Sessions dialog box. (You can click Spell to check for any spelling
errors in the current sessions notes, and you can click Print to
print the current session information.)
Turn to the next section, Entering Nodes, Steps or Systems, to continue
setting up your study.

Entering Nodes, Steps, Categories,
Systems 3
To make a study manageable and to focus the efforts of the study team,
the facility is divided into units called nodes, steps or systems.
NOTE:
For simplicity, the following steps refer to a HAZOP study that is
divided into nodes. If you are creating a procedural HAZOP
study, replace the word node with step. If you are creating
another type of study, replace the word node with system.
To create the list of nodes for your project, follow these steps:
1. Select Nodes from the Project Task Center, and click Go To.
The Nodes dialog box for the current project appears:
Since you are defining a new project, no nodes appear in the list at this
time. You can define all the nodes for your project now. You may also
add more nodes later if you wish.
2. Choose the Add button.
The Add a Node dialog box appears:
3. Type the name for the node and click OK or press ENTER.
The new name is added to the list.

4. To add more nodes to the list, repeat steps 2 and 3.
If you have configured your project so that drawings are related to 3
nodes, you can specify which drawings relate to which nodes. Follow
these steps:
1. Select a node in the node list.
2. Click the Drawings button, choose Drawings from the function
menu, or press ALT+W.
3. In the Drawings list, check all drawings you wish to associate
with the selected node. Repeat this step as necessary.
4. To return to the nodes list, click OK.
If you have configured your project to use components, you can also
define that information now. Follow these steps:
1. Select a node.
2. Click the Components button, choose Components from the func-
tion menu or press ALT+O.
4. In the Component dialog box, type the component type (or use the
drop-down list), qualifier and ID, and click OK.
Entering Parameters
If you are configuring a HAZOP study, but opted not to use the global
lists of parameters, choose a node from the nodes list, click the Param-
eters button and type the related parameters in a parameters list. This
list of parameters is independent for each node in the study.
NOTE:
If you did opt to use the global parameters, they will show up in
every node.
If you are configuring another type of study, you will most likely type
a list of subsystems associated with a system into a Subsystems list.
This list of subsystems is different for each system in the study. (A
Checklist study uses categories instead of subsystems.)
To return to the Project Task Center, click OK.
Turn to the next section, Specifying Project Options, to continue setting
up your study.

Specifying Project Options
3
The Project Task Center contains a list of Project Options that you
may wish to complete before beginning your study. This section pro-
vides instructions for some of the options you are most likely to access
for a new project.
Defining the Banner Configuration
The banner is the top portion of the worksheet, and identifies the cur-
rent node, system, parameter, subsytem, document, etc., under study.
You can configure the banner to display different fields and, in some
cases, change the number of lines displayed in fields.
To modify the banner, follow these steps:
1. Select Banner configuration from the Project Task Center and
click Go To.
The Banner Configuration dialog box appears:
The dialog box you see may contain different items, depending on
how you have configured your study.
2. Make sure the check box is selected for each field you wish to
include in the banner.
3. When youre finished making your selections, click OK.

Setting a Risk Ranking Scheme
3
A risk ranking scheme determines a risk value on the basis of the study
teams input regarding the likelihood and severity of an occurrence of
the hazard scenario. PHAWorks allows you to define the severity and
likelihood levels and the risk values.
To specify a risk ranking scheme, follow these steps:
1. Choose Project risk ranking from the Project Task Center.
2. Make sure the Use risk ranking check box is checked.

If the current scheme is satisfactory, click OK to leave the dialog
box. Otherwise, continue with step 3 to change the current set-
tings.
3. Set the following options to reflect the ranking scheme you want to
use:
Lower severity values are more serious

NOTE:
These setting are used only for the Risk Statistical report.
4. To add severity or likelihood levels, select the list you wish to edit,
click the Add button and type a name for the new level.
5. The Risk Ranking dialog box now allows you to enter your own
values for the Severity and Likelihood (S/L) columns. You may
use up to four characters, in a combination of letters and numer-
als, to define those values. When you enter an S/L value, you will
be prompted to indicate the following items:

S/L Value (up to four characters, numerals and/or letters),
and
3
A description.
6. If you want to see the risk ranking grid, click the Risk Grid button:
The Risk Grid appears:
7. Click Swap (or press ALT+S) if you want to swap the severity and
likelihood axes on the grid.
8. To leave the risk ranking grid, click OK.
9. To leave the Risk Ranking dialog box, click OK. If you want to exit
the dialog box without saving any changes, click Cancel.
PHAWorks takes you back to the Project Task Center.
Copying Information from Another Project

Copying information from another project can save considerable time
and effort. Follow these steps to copy information from another project:
1. Choose Copy from other project from the Project Task Center.
PHAWorks prompts you to select a source project:

3
2. Choose a project and click Open.

NOTE:
The source project you choose must be the same PHA project type
as the destination project. In addition, some items in this dialog
box require that the project configuration items be the same for
both source and destination.
After you select a project, this dialog box appears:
3. Select the items you want to copy into the new project, and click
Copy. (You can browse a list of source items for items to be copied.
This is helpful in determining what program information you need
to copy into the destination project.) PHAWorks displays a mes-
sage when the copy is completed.

Proceeding to the Worksheet
3
To proceed to the worksheet from the Project Task Center, specify the
worksheet format youd like to use:
choose the Spreadsheet button to go to a traditional spreadsheet
worksheet format.
choose the Datasheet button to go to the top-down worksheet for-
mat.
choose the Tree button to go to the hierarchical representation of
the worksheet data.
The Tree format lets you view the data and navigate within the work-
sheet structure. The other formats let you enter and edit data.
When you choose one of these buttons, PHAWorks prompts you for
information for the worksheet, such as node, parameter, drawings or
guidewords.
In future sessions, follow these steps to open a worksheet:
1. Choose Open Project from the File menu or choose the Open
icon ( ) from the toolbar.
2. Choose a project from the Open Project dialog box.
3. Select any information or options to modify from the Project Task
Center.
4. Click one of the worksheet buttons and follow the prompts for
worksheet information.
Youre now ready to begin entering information for a Revalidation
PHA or an Update PHA. If you are new to PHAWorks, you may find it
useful to spend a few minutes going through the lessons in Chapter 5,
PHAWorks Tutorial.
Chapter 4, PHAWorks Basics, describes the basic features of the soft-
ware such as opening and closing projects, moving around the work-
sheet and so on.

Chapter 4 PHAWorks
4
Basics
This chapter introduces, and provides step-by-step instructions, for

the most common tasks associated with running the various types of
studies with PHAWorks, including:
using the PHAWorks toolbar.
opening and closing projects (and opening additional project win-
dows).
moving around a worksheet (using the Navigate menu).
using Bookmarks.
using the Quick Access feature.
using keyboard shortcuts.
entering data for your study.
specifying locations of program files.
specifying software preferences.
changing font attributes in worksheets and dialog boxes.
printing items and specifying page setup.
saving and backing up projects.
converting project files from HAZWARE programs
(i.e., HAZOP-PC).
getting additional help.
exiting PHAWorks.
PHAWorks Basics 4-115

Using the PHAWorks Program
Window 4
When you start PHAWorks, this window appears:
Like other standard Windows programs, the PHAWorks application

window contains:
a title bar
a menu bar
a toolbar
minimize and maximize buttons
a status line
a Close button
If you are unfamiliar with Microsoft Windows, please refer to your Win-
dows documentation for general user interface instructions.

Using the Toolbar
4
The PHAWorks toolbar provides a shortcut for accessing various menu
items. For example, rather than select the Open Project... command
from the File menu, you could click the Open Project icon ( ):
NOTE:
If you cant remember what an icon means, simply point to it with
your mouse cursor. A brief definition appears under the icon (as
shown in the illustration above). This definition also appears in
the status line, as do function menu items.
The icons that appear in the toolbar change based on the current win-
dow. Since you may find that you use some of the icons frequently but
rarely use other icons, PHAWorks gives you the ability to configure
the toolbar. Chapter 6, Modifying Worksheet Presentation, provides more
information about how to do this.

Dialog Box Tips
4
When you point to buttons in dialog boxes, pop-up tips provide addi-
tional information about the buttons in dialog boxes, as shown below.
These tips are designed to help you when you first use the software.
You may find that, after you have mastered the basics, you no longer
need this additional help.
To disable the tips in dialog boxes, follow these steps:
1. Choose Options... from the Utilities menu, or choose the Options
2. Click the Preferences tab.

The Preferences page appears:
3. Make sure the Show tips in dialog boxes check box is not selected
(remove the check mark).
4. Click OK.
NOTE:
You can also enable and disable these tips in a dialog box by
selecting Show Tips in the dialog box function menu.

Opening a Project
4
To open a project, follow these steps:
1. Click the Open Project icon ( ).
or
Choose Open Project from the File menu.
or
Press CTRL+O.
The Open Project dialog box appears:
NOTE:
The EXAMPLE.HPW project is used for this section. Based on the
project you select and your settings, the software may ask you to
process protocols.
Note that this dialog box initially shows all PHA Projects, but you
can view projects of a specific type by selecting that option from
the Files of type drop-down list box. In addition, you may need to
switch the Drives or Directories (or Folders, in Windows 95) to
find the file you wish to open.
If you choose a project from the list of recently opened projects in
the File menu, PHAWorks bypasses the Open Project dialog box.
2. Select the project file and click OK.
NOTE:
You can have more than one PHA project and/or project type open
at one time (following the steps given above).

Using the Project Task Center
4
After you choose a project file, the Project Task Center appears:
The Project Task Center appears every time you open a project so that
you have an opportunity to add to or modify project information and
options. You can click on the Spreadsheet or Datasheet buttons to
proceed to a worksheet; use the Tree button to see a hierarchical struc-
ture of your project or as a navigation tool; or use the Quick Access
button to jump easily to any location in the project.
After you open a project, the Project Task Center remains open so that
you can easily access one of the project information items or options.
You can switch to the Project Task Center through the Project menu or
through the Window menu or by pressing F8.
Choosing Worksheet Information

After you choose a project and a worksheet format, PHAWorks may
prompt you for worksheet information such as:
a system/node/step
a subsystem/parameter/category
components
drawings
a guideword and/or deviation

NOTE:
If you choose Tree or Quick Access from the Project Task
Center, PHAWorks does not prompt you for any worksheet
4
information.
Heres an example for opening a worksheet for a HAZOP study that

uses nodes and parameters:
1. In the Project Task Center, click either Spreadsheet or Datasheet.
PHAWorks prompts you to choose a node:
2. Select a node and click Proceed.

You are prompted to choose a parameter:
3. Select a parameter and click Proceed.

If you have opted to use Drawings as part of your documentation
of the study, you may also be prompted to tag a drawing.

PHAWorks displays the selected information in the banner and
places the cursor in the GW column, ready for you to insert entries
into the worksheet. 4
After you open a project, you can have a single worksheet open in a
window, or you can open multiple worksheets with different primary
and secondary division items. The following sections provide infor-
mation about opening project windows, switching window formats,
finding worksheet information and using keys to move within a work-
sheet or between windows.
Opening Additional Project Windows
You can have more than one project window open at a time.
NOTE:
Refer to Chapter 6, Modifying Worksheet Presentation, for
more information about switching project windows.
To open additional windows, choose New Worksheet Window from

the Window menu, then select the worksheet format you want to use.
If you are opening a spreadsheet or datasheet window, you are
prompted to select node/parameter or system/subsystem information.
The new worksheet window appears:
NOTE:
If you select the same worksheet, a confirmation promt may
appear.

This example shows the windows after choosing Cascade from the
Window menu (they are not maximized in the application workspace).
For more information about maximizing and restoring windows, refer 4
to your Windows documentation.
You can switch between the Spreadsheet, Datasheet and Tree work-
sheet formats at any time during your study. The following section
defines each format.
Using the Spreadsheet Format
The Spreadsheet format will be familiar to you if you have used other
products from Primatech. In this worksheet format, entries are dis-
played in horizontal columns:
When you are entering data, PHAWorks maintains the hierarchical

relationship of data. For example, when you type an entry in the Causes
column, then tab to the Consequences column and type an entry there,
these entries in the two columns are related. The entry in the Causes
column is the parent entry, and the entry in the Consequences column
is the child entry. The parent/child relationship will vary depending
on your project configuration.
When you select an entry in a Spreadsheet worksheet, the parent and
child entries of the current entry may change either the color of the text
or their background color.
NOTE:
You can modify how the parent and child entries appear in the
Display page in the Options dialog box. For more information,
refer to Chapter 6, Modifying Worksheet Presentation.

Using the Datasheet Format
The Datasheet format presents worksheet information in a top-down

4
format, as shown below:
In this documentation, the vertical portions of the Datasheet window

are sometimes referred to as panes. As shown below, a pane can have
one or more columns:
Aside from the differences in the presentation of information, the

Datasheet format differs from the Spreadsheet format in that when you
select an entry, only the child entries that relate to the current entry are
shown.

Using the Tree Format
The Tree format enables you to view the hierarchical structure of the
4
data in the worksheet:
The Tree is expandable and collapsible at each level. To expand or

collapse a level, you can double-click it. You can also select an item and
use the Expand ( ) and Collapse ( ) icons on the toolbar to display
or hide all information under the current item. Clicking these icons once
expands or collapses everything under the current item one level.
You can also expand and collapse levels in the Tree by clicking folders
that contain the + and - symbols. To expand or collapse all of the
entries, use the commands in the Tree menu.
The Tree format function menu includes commands letting you switch
to a Spreadsheet or Datasheet format and Expand or Collapse all of the
folders at a given level.
You can use the Tree format either as a reference to the current work-
sheet data relationships or as a navigational tool within the work-
sheet. For example, you can look for a specific question in a worksheet,
select that entry, and, when you return to either the Spreadsheet or
Datasheet format, that entry appears as the current entry in the work-
sheet.

Navigating a Project
4
The Navigate menu provides the commands you need for moving be-
tween open worksheets, library topics, and other windows:
The commands available to you through this menu depend on which

window is active.
PHAWorks also keeps track of the worksheets or topics that you open
in essence, a history of your activities in the program that you easily
access. The Navigate menu includes the Jump Backward and Jump
Forward commands for this feature, or you can use quick key combina-
tions or icons ( or ) to jump between items. To return to previ-
ously open items, press CTRL+- or Press CTRL++ to move forward to
the next item.
This section describes how to use the Quick Access feature and how to
use bookmarks. A subsequent section lists the keys that can be used in
PHAWorks.
Using the Quick Access Feature
The Quick Access feature displays a simple tree structure from

which you can select the deviations or subsystems for which you
have worksheet information. This allows you to easily move between
worksheets.
To use the Quick Access feature, follow these steps:
1. Choose Quick Access from the Navigate menu, press CTRL+A
or choose the Quick Access icon ( ).

The Quick Access dialog box appears:
This dialog box shows all of the current nodes, steps or systems in
the project (as you have configured your project).
NOTE:
If you are running a HAZOP study, the Quick Access dialog box
also lets you specify whether you want to see the complete
guideword and parameter combination (for example, No + Flow)
for all deviations, selected deviations or no deviations.
2. To see the deviations or subsystems for each node, step or system,

click Expand All.
3. Select the item you want to go to in the worksheet and click Go To
(or double-click the item).
If you select a primary division item and click Go To, you will be
prompted for additional worksheet information (such as param-
eter, subsystem or drawing).
PHAWorks displays the worksheet and highlights the item you
had selected.
The Quick Access feature also lets you specify a few options. Choose
the Options button in the Quick Access dialog box to see the Options
dialog box:

You can specify Quick Access to automatically highlight the First Node/
System in the project or the Current Node/System.
Select Automatically expand selected Node/System if you want Quick
4
Access to automatically display the list of parameter/deviation com-
bination or subsystems when you select a new step or system.
Select Collapse after leaving Node/System if you want the lists of
parameters or subsystems to collapse each time you leave an item and
click on a new node or system.
Using Bookmarks
The Bookmark feature, accessed from the Navigate menu, provides a
quick, efficient means for moving between items. You can bookmark
worksheet entries, Library topics, Analysis Tools and more. This sec-
tion describes how to add bookmarks, access the list of bookmarks and
move between bookmarks.
Adding Bookmarks
To bookmark an item, place the cursor in the current text or topic and
do one of the following:
Press CTRL+M.
or
Select New Bookmark from the Bookmarks submenu.
You can access bookmarks in different windows and in different

projects.
NOTE:
If you delete an item that has been bookmarked, the Bookmarks
dialog box displays a symbol next to the bookmark ( ), indicat-
ing that the item is no longer available.
No special character is added to an entry when you bookmark it. In-

stead, the entry is added to the list of bookmarks.

Moving Between Bookmarks
You can move between bookmarks in two ways:

4
Select a bookmark listed at the bottom of the Bookmarks submenu.
or
Select a bookmark from the Bookmarks dialog box.
To move to a bookmark from the Bookmarks dialog box, follow these

steps:
1. Choose Bookmarks from the Navigate menu.
2. Choose Bookmarks List from the Bookmarks submenu.
The Bookmarks dialog box appears:
If a bookmark is in the current project, it is preceded by this sym-

bol: . If a bookmarked entry is already in the current window, it is
preceded by this symbol: . If a bookmarked entry has been de-
leted, it is preceded by this symbol: .
3. Select a bookmarked entry from the list and click Go To.
Deleting Bookmarks
To delete a bookmark from the Bookmarks dialog box, follow these

steps:
1. Choose Bookmarks from the Navigate menu.
2. Choose Bookmarks List from the Bookmarks submenu.
The Bookmarks dialog box appears.
3. Select the bookmarked entry from the list and click Delete.
NOTE:
When you delete a bookmark, you are removing a reference to a
location. The text in the location itself remains unchanged.

Using Keyboard Shortcuts
4
This section lists the default cursor control keys, the function keys and
the keyboard shortcuts used in PHAWorks.
In addition to these keyboard shortcuts, or accelerators, you can create
your own custom shortcut key combinations by selecting the Accel-
erators tab in the Options dialog box under the Utilities menu.
Cursor Control Keys
These keys and key combinations control cursor movement:

Key(s) Function
Moves up one line
Moves down one line
Moves left one character
Moves right one character

CTRL+ Moves to the start of an entry or to the previous
entry

CTRL+ Moves to the end of an entry or to the next
entry

CTRL+ Moves to the start of a word or to the previous
word

CTRL+ Moves to the first character of the next word
PGUP Moves up one page (in a worksheet or in a
pane)
PGDN Moves down one page (in a worksheet or in
a pane)
CTRL+PGUP Moves to the top of current entries (in a
worksheet or in a pane)
CTRL+PGDN Moves to the bottom of current entries (in a
worksheet or in a pane)
HOME Moves to the beginning of current line
END Moves to the end of current line
CTRL+HOME Moves to the top of project (after confirmtion)
CTRL+END Moves to the bottom of project (after
confirmation)
CTRL+ENTER Inserts a hard return at the text cursor postion

Key(s) Function
CTRL+- Moves back to the previous location 4
CTRL++ Moves forward to the next location
CTRL+> Moves to the next topic or worksheet
CTRL+< Moves to the previous topic or worksheet
CTRL+ALT+= Increases column width
CTRL+ALT+- Decreases column width
SHIFT Marks text when pressed down
The PGUP and PGDN keys also move between worksheets or related
entries.
Control Key Combinations

Below is a list of the additional default key combinations to access
other program features. Because you can create your own accelerators,
all of these combinations can be changed.
Key(s) Function
CTRL+A Opens the Quick Access dialog box
CTRL+B Moves to the worksheet banner
CTRL+SHIFT+B Makes selected text bold
CTRL+C Copies currently selected text to the clipboard
CTRL+D Opens the Deviation dialog box
CTRL+E Opens the Quick Entry list for the current
column
CTRL+F Opens the Find dialog box
CTRL+G Opens the Guidewords dialog box
CTRL+H Switches to the Spreadsheet format
CTRL+I Switches to the Datasheet format
CTRL+SHIFT+I Makes selected text italic
CTRL+J Switches to the Tree format
CTRL+K Opens the Sage Causes dialog box
CTRL+L Opens the Library feature, or switches to
a Library topic, if you have one open
CTRL+M Drops a new bookmark at the current cursor
location

Key(s) Function
CTRL+N Opens the Nodes dialog box to choose a new 4
parameter or edit the node list
CTRL+SHIFT+N Makes selected text normal
CTRL+O Opens an existing project
CTRL+P Opens the Parameters dialog box to choose
a new parameter or edit the parameter list
CTRL+R Opens the Referenced Items dialog box or
creates a reference
CTRL+S Saves the current project
CTRL+SHIFT+S Makes selected text superscript
CTRL+T Opens the Analysis Tools feature
CTRL+U Opens the dialog box for the secondary divi-
sion of the project
CTRL+SHIFT+U Makes selected text underlined
CTRL+V Pastes clipboard contents at the current cur-
sor location
CTRL+W Returns to the worksheet from another loca-
tion
CTRL+X Cuts the currently selected text to the clip-
board
CTRL+Y Opens the dialog box for the primary divi-
sion of the project
CTRL+Z Undoes the previous keystroke
CTRL+SHIFT+Z Redoes the previous keystroke
CTRL+number Opens the worksheet view, where number is
view 1 through 6
ALT+A Opens the Add an Item dialog box
ALT+D Deletes an entry/section from a Quick Entry
list
ALT+E Opens the Edit an Item dialog box
ALT+P Opens the Print an Item dialog box
ALT+R Opens the Rename an Item dialog box

Function Keys
4
Here is a list of function keys to use with PHAWorks:
Key(s) Function
F1 Opens context-sensitive help
F2 Prints the current item
F3 Deletes the current entry
F4 Inserts a new entry at the current cursor position
F5 Toggles between edit mode and view mode
F6 Shows and hides the banner
F8 Opens the Project Task Center
F11 Resizes the current column (keyboard method)
F12 Renames the current column

Entering Data
4
You can enter data into the worksheet in several ways:
Type in the information.
Insert data from the clipboard (for example, data that has been
copied from Analysis Tools, the Library or another program).
Choose a cause or causes from the Sage database.
Choose items from a quick entry list and allow the program to enter
them into the worksheet.
Use the Copy from other project command.
Typing in Worksheet Columns
Entering data into the worksheet is similar to using a word processor.

That is, the current text cursor location marks where new text will be
inserted. Any new block of text in a worksheet column is called an
entry (roughly equivalent to a paragraph). The text cursor and current
entry color indicates your current location in the worksheet. This for-
matting is defined in the Display page of the Options dialog box, which
is accessed through the Utilities menu.
When your text reaches the right side of the column, PHAWorks auto-
matically breaks the line at the end of a word and wraps the text to the
beginning of the next line in the same column. This means that you can
type large entries without having to press ENTER at the end of each
line.
NOTE:
To modify the worksheet (or other text in PHAWorks features),
you must be in edit mode. The status line identifies which mode
you are in. Pressing F5 toggles between edit and view modes.
Indicating Special Recommendations

When you type entries in the Recommendations, they are considered
action items. To indicate if a recommendation is an information need,
type an asterisk (*) as the first character of the entry. When you gener-
ate reports, all recommendations beginning with an asterisk are in-
cluded in Information Needs reports.

In addition, if you dont want a recommendation to be considered as
either an action item or an information need, type a colon as the first
entry, which makes that entry a comment. 4
For more information about reports, refer to Chapter 10, Generating
Reports.
Moving Between Entries
The PHAWorks worksheet has many columns. How you use these
columns depends on your study and the information you are working
with at any given time.
NOTE:
In general, this documentation refers to the information in a
project window as a worksheet (even if you are looking at that
information in the Database format), and refers to the physical
entities within the worksheet as columns.
Even with only a few columns in a worksheet view with the Spread-
sheet or Datasheet formats, you may not be able to see all of the infor-
mation in the worksheet window. To move through the columns in the
worksheet, do one of the following:
Click in the column you want to edit or read (you may need to use
the scroll bars first to display that column in the document win-
dow).
or
Press TAB or SHIFT+TAB to move through the columns.
You can use TAB and SHIFT+TAB to move to a column not currently
visible in the window (within the current worksheet view). If the text
cursor is in the last column of the worksheet view and you press TAB,
the cursor moves to the first column. The same idea applies when
pressing the SHIFT+TAB key to move to the left.

Using the Clipboard
4
If you are familiar with Microsoft Windows, then you already know
that the clipboard is a temporary location for data that you wish to
copy from one location into another. For example, if you want to copy
information from the Library into a worksheet column, you can copy
that text into the clipboard and then paste the text in the column.
The clipboard makes it possible to cut and copy data from any source
and paste it into almost every destination, including other programs.
The Edit menu provides commands for cutting, copying and pasting
items. Another way to access the Clipboard is to use the icons on the
PHAWorks toolbar. (These icons also appear in some dialog boxes
such as the Master Team List dialog box.) The following table list the
keyboard shortcut and icon for each command.
Command Keyboard Shortcut Icon
Cut CTRL+X
Copy CTRL+C
Paste CTRL+V
These keyboard shortcuts are standard for all Windows applications.

Specifying Locations
4
The Locations page of the Options dialog box allows you to specify
different directories for the Library, the added words file, Sage, Risk
Ranking and the Master team list.
To access the Locations options, follow these steps:
1. Choose Options from the Utilities menu.
2. Choose the Locations tab.
The Locations page appears:
By default the location for the Library file, Sage database, risk rank-
ing for new projects and the Master team list is the \DATA direc-
tory (created as a subdirectory of the directory in which you in-
stalled the program).
3. Type the new drive and directory for any of the items in the dialog
box. You can also click the browse button if youre not sure of the
name of the directory.
NOTE:
Specifying a directory in this dialog box does not copy the files.
Instead, it tells PHAWorks where to look for them or where to
create them.
4. Click OK.

Selecting Preferences
4
The Preferences page of the Options dialog box allows you to specify
various items to set up PHAWorks for the way you work.
To access the Preferences options, follow these steps:
1. Choose Options from the Utilities menu, or choose the Options
2. Click the Preferences tab.

The Preferences page appears:
3. Click the check boxes of the preferences you want to set.

4. Click OK.
The following sections describe each preference in more detail.
Setting the Exit Verification Option

If you select this item, PHAWorks asks you for verification each time
before you exit the program:
Verify Before Exiting the Program

To be able to exit the program without first verifying your choice, turn
this feature off.

Setting the Overwrite Option
4
Being able to overwrite project files in the File Maintenance feature
makes it convenient to maintain backup copies of your projects. How-
ever, some File Maintenance operations can destroy existing project
files if they are not used carefully.
If you wish to create a separate copy of your project at the end of a
study session but you did not select the Allow Overwrite in File Main-
tenance option, PHAWorks wont let you copy the project file over an
existing file. In this instance, you need to provide a different name or a
different location for each copy.
If you select this option and you try to overwrite an existing file,
PHAWorks warns you if you are about to destroy an existing project
and asks you to verify that this is what you intend to do.
Enabling the Severity and Likelihood

Definitions Pop-up
Use this option to enable the Severity and Likelihood Definitions Pop-
up. If enabled, the pop-up appears each time you enter the S (severity)
or L (likelihood) columns in the worksheet. The pop-up displays the
meanings of the available risk rankings.
Displaying and Printing Dates Using

the Long Format
Select these options if you want to display and/or print long dates on
a worksheet. For example, September 3, 2000, is the long version of
09/03/00. Exactly how the date will look depends upon your Win-
dows date format settings.
Use Sage for Automatic Deviations

Check this check box to use the Sage Deviations list in the Sage data-
base to create automatic deviations.

Check if Guideword Entries Are in
Guideword Lists 4
Use this option if you want PHAWorks to compare what you type in
the GW column to the entries in the guideword list.
Showing Dialog Box Tips
When you point to buttons in dialog boxes, pop-up tips appear and
provide additional information about the buttons. Select this option to
enable these pop-up tips.
Confirming Drag-and-drop in Dialog Boxes
Select this option if you want PHAWorks to display a short confirma-

tion dialog box (asking if you want the current entry to Move Here or
if you want to Cancel) before moving a selected entry.
Confirming the Change to Edit Mode
When you select this option, a confirmation dialog box will appear
before you change to Edit Mode.
Enabling the Protocols Prompter
In PHAWorks 4.1, you were prompted to confirm whether or not youd

like to process protocols. In PHAWorks 5, you can indicate whether
youd like to be prompted for protocols. If the option to Prompt for
protocols is checked (this is the default setting), you will be prompted
to process protocols. If this option isnt checked, the appropriate pro-
tocols will still be loaded in the project, but you wont be prompted to
process them.
Saving a Project
When you want to save the current project, you can choose the Save
Project command or the Save Project As... command from the File
menu, you can click the Save icon (icon) or you can press CTRL+S.

Setting the Maximum Number of Lines for
Column Names 4
This option lets you determine how many lines of a column name, if
that name is longer than one line, will be displayed in your worksheet.
You can choose from one line to nine lines.
Enabling the Show Entry Note Indicator

Use this option if you intend to use the entry note feature, and wish to
see a symbol or other text indicating the presence of a note in a column.
In PHAWorks 5, you can choose not to show entry notes, to show them
as text or to show them at bitmaps.

Changing Font Attributes
4
PHAWorks 5 lets you change the font, or typeface, size in worksheet
entries and banner dialog boxes. It also lets you change various font
attributes, such as making text italic or bold, in worksheet entries.
Reformatting Text in the Worksheet

You can change the text format within worksheet entries in the Spread-
sheet or Datasheet views. You can make fonts smaller or larger, and
you can make them italic, bold and underlined, as well as superscript
or subscript. You can do this by using the new Format menu, by right-
clicking on an entry, by using the keyboard or by clicking on the ap-
propriate toolbar icon.
NOTE:
When you make text format changes in the Spreadsheet or
Datasheet views, those changes are reflected in the Tree view.
To change the format of a worksheet entry, follow these steps:

1. Select the entry you wish to format by clicking on it.
2. Highlight the text itself (for single or multiple entries).
3. Click on the Format menu to open it or right-click on the entry to
open the worksheet function menu.
4. Select the format option you want by clicking on it.

You can also select some of the format styles by using the following
keystrokes:
Format Keys
Bold CTRL+SHIFT+B
Italic CTRL+SHIFT+I
Underline CTRL+SHIFT+U
Superscript CTRL+SHIFT+S

Changing Font Size in Dialog Boxes
4
PHAWorks 5 lets you change the font size (make the letters smaller or
larger) of the type in most of the worksheet banner dialog boxes. This
feature is available for the Parameter Intention, Node Intention, Node/
System, Node/System Notes, Subsystem/Parameter, Subsystem/Pa-
rameter Notes, Worksheet Notes, Rename/Nodes/System/Subsystem/
Parameter, Drawing and Drawing Details dialog boxes, as well as the
Purpose, Scope, Objective, Process Description and Chemicals fields
in the Project Identification dialog box. It is also available in the Risk
Ranking/Add ... Definitions and Edit ... Definitions dialog boxes.
NOTE:
The increase/decrease font buttons do not directly appear in the
Node/System, Drawing or Rename Node/System/Subsystem/
Parameter dialogs. To access the buttons in these dialogs, you
must access the Add or Rename dialog boxes.
To change the font size in dialog boxes, follow these steps:

1. Select a dialog box by going to the Worksheet menu or by moving
the cursor to the banner field and clicking the right mouse button
to access the function menu.
The dialog box of your choice appears.
2. Enter your comments or notes in the dialog box (or field, in the case
of the Project Identification dialog box).
3. Click on the increase font icon ( ) to make the entrys font larger,
or click on the decrease font icon ( ) to make the entrys font
smaller.
NOTE:
If you increase the font size in a specific worksheet entry, then
increase the font size of all worksheet entries, the specific entry you
changed previously will remain larger than the other entries. For
example, if you highlight one entry and click the increase font
button once, which increases the font 20 percent, then you high-
light all entries and increase the font size of all entries in the
worksheet, the font size of the original entry will remain 20
percent larger than that in the rest of the entries.

Printing from PHAWorks
4
In addition to printing reports, you can use the Print command from
the File menu to print text in the current worksheet, Analysis Tools
Topic windows, Library Topic windows and Project Notes windows.
Many dialog boxes also include a Print button.
The following sections provide information on the printing options
available to you when printing from PHAWorks.
Specifying Print Setup
Choose the Print Setup command on the File menu to choose an

installed printer, change the default printer or access other printing
options for the selected printer. The Paper Orientation selected here
will be saved when you leave the dialog box. For more information
about the options in the Print Setup dialog box, consult the Windows
help or documentation.
Specifying Page Setup
The Page Setup dialog box lets you change how PHAWorks prints
various program items. Follow these steps:
1. Choose Page Setup from the File menu.
The Page Setup dialog box appears:
2. Select an item from the list.

3. Choose either Font, Text Color or Background to open the Font or
Color dialog boxes. (These dialog boxes are standard Windows
dialog boxes. For more information, refer to your Windows docu- 4
mentation.) When you make changes to the font or to the text or
background colors, you will see the changes in the preview dis-
play box.
4. Type in Margins for the printed page (Left, Right, Top and Bot-
tom).
5. To exit the Page Setup dialog box and save your changes, click
OK, or click Cancel to exit the dialog box without saving your
changes.
Page Setup Items
Click the drop-down list inside the top portion of the Page Setup dia-
log box to list the report types whose formats can be changed to alter
the appearance of their printed versions.
Analysis Tools
Common
Library
Project Identification
Project Notes
Protocol
Protocol Database
Worksheet
Each page type contains several of the items listed in the table below.
Item Definition
Report Title The title of a printed report
Worksheet Entry A worksheet entry or other report item (such
as sessions or project information)
Header Labels Worksheet banner labels and other labels for
report headers (such as page number, com-
pany name and facility)
Header Text The text in report header fields
Normal Text The text in the body of a report

Item Definition
Column Names The names of columns in reports 4
Report Footer The text that appears at the bottom of every
page
Analysis Tools Text in an Analysis Tools topic
Analysis Tools Items in a list that are meant to be inserted
checklist items into the worksheet
Library Text in a Library topic
Project Notes Text from project notes
Protocol Entry The text of a protocol entry
Protocol Column The names of columns in protocol

Names
Protocol Question The text of a protocol question
Protocol Question The text of a Protocol Question

Explanation explanation
NOTE:
These items only affect what you print, and have no effect on the
worksheet presentation.

Saving and Backing Up Projects
4
To save the currently open project, choose Save Project or Save Project
As... from the File menu or press CTRL+S. To back up the currently
open project, choose Backup Project from the File menu.
Backup of projectname.HPW (for HAZOP project files)
Backup of projectname.WPW (for What-If project files)
Backup of projectname.LPW (for What-If/Checklist project files)
Backup of projectname.FPW (for FMEA project files)
Backup of projectname.CPW (for Checklist project files)
Backup of projectname.RPW (for RMP [Hazard Review] project files)
Backup of projectname.SPW (for RMP [Standards Review] project
files)
Backup of projectname.PPW (for PrHA project files)
where projectname is the same name as the project file.
Each subsequent time you choose Backup Project, the project data is
saved to the backup file as listed above (each time overwriting the
existing backup file).
Selecting the Timed Automatic Backup
PHAWorks includes a Timed automatic backup feature that you can

use to back up your projects more frequently. This feature is the default
setting for the program.
NOTE:
The Backup Project... command only backs up the active project.
All projects, however, are backed up by the timed automatic
backup. The backup file is overwritten each time the project is
backed up.
To disable this feature, or to change its frequency or the location of the

backed up file, choose the Backup tab in the Options dialog box under
the Utilities menu. Click on the box beside Enable timed automatic
backup, so that there is no longer a check mark in the box.

To change the frequency of the backup, make sure that there is a check
mark in the box beside Enable timed automatic backup, and type the
number of minutes between saves in the Every xx minutes box. 4
To change the location of a backed up file from the default location,
which is the project directory, click on the Backup in: radio button and
choose where youd like the backup file to be located.

Converting Projects
4
PHAWorks allows you to open and convert project files that were
created with the following programs:
! PHAWorks (all versions)
! FMEA-PC V1
! HAZOP-PC (all versions)
! PHA-PC V3
! WHAT-IF-PC V3 and V4
NOTE:
If you have a project created with WHAT IF-PC version 2 or
PHA-PC version 2, you need to convert that project to a version 3
format before you continue with these directions. There are two
conversion utilities available with PHAWorks. Run the program
of the conversion utility that you require from the program group,
and follow the instructions on the screen.
Generally speaking, there are three conversion scenarios:

If youre converting an older PHAWorks project (V1 to V4.1), you
can open the project to read or edit it. Clicking on Save (while in
edit mode) converts the open project and overwrites the original
file so that it can no longer be opened in an older version of
PHAWorks.
If you want to convert an older PHAWorks project to a new project
file, you need to use the Save Project As... command. Clicking on
Save Project As... keeps the current project intact and saves it with
a new name.
If youre converting a project from a DOS-based program, you can
open it in view mode and read it without converting it. If you want
to edit the project, however, you need to use the Save Project As...
command. Clicking on Save Project As... keeps the original DOS-
based project intact. The DOS-based project is converted to a new
PHAWorks project with a different name.

Converting an Older PHAWorks Project File
4
Converting an Older PHAWorks Project File in Place
To convert an older project file keeping the same name, follow these
steps:
1. Choose Open Project from the File menu.
The Open Project dialog box appears.
2. Select the drive and directory of the project from the Look in: list
box.
3. In the Files of type: list box, select the type of project you wish to
convert.
Files with extensions corresponding to the files of type you have
chosen (.HPW, .WPW, etc.) appear in the file list box.
4. Select the file and click Open.
A Please Confirm dialog box appears, warning you that if you
save the project in the current version of PHAWorks, it will no
longer be compatible with the older version, and asking whether
you want to open the project in edit mode.
5. Click Yes.
NOTE:
Until you click on Save, the project is not converted. You can open
an old PHAWorks project file in edit mode and use the Save
Project As... command to keep the old project file intact. However,
if you click on Save, rather than Save Project As..., the project is
converted and the original file is overwritten.
The Project Task Center opens, and the project is in edit mode.
6. After editing the project, convert it by clicking Save or by closing
the project.
If you dont Save before closing the project, a Project Changed
dialog box appears:

7. Click Yes to convert and save the project.
NOTE: 4
PHAWorks 5 can open a project saved in any version of
PHAWorks, but once a project has been saved by PHAWorks 5, that
project can no longer be opened in an earlier version of the program.
Converting an Older PHAWorks Project File to a New

Project File
To convert an older project file to a new project file, follow these steps:
box.
convert.
chosen (.HPW, .WPW, etc.) appear in the file list box.
A Please Confirm dialog box appears, warning you that if you
save it in the current version of PHAWorks, it will no longer be
compatible with the older version, and asking whether you want
to open the project in edit mode.
5. Click No.
The Project Task Center opens, and the project is in view mode.
You can view the project data, but you cannot make any changes
to it.
6. Select the Save Project As... command under the File menu.
The Save Project As... dialog box appears.
7. Enter the new name for this project.
8. Click Save. The original project is intact.

Converting a DOS-Based Project File
4
To convert a DOS-based project file, follow these steps:
box.
convert.
chosen (.HPC, .WPC, .WI4, etc.) appear in the file list box.
If the original file is in edit mode, a Please Note dialog box ap-
pears, warning you that the project youre opening cannot be up-
dated in PHAWorks, and explaining that you need to use Save
Project As... to convert the project before you can edit it.
5. Click OK.
The Project Task Center opens, and the project is in view mode.
6. Select the Save Project As... command under the File menu.
The Save Project As... dialog box appears.
7. Enter the new name for this project.
8. Click Save. This automatically saves the project as a PHAWorks 5
file. You can now edit the project.
NOTE:
If you want to read a DOS-based project without editing it, you
can do so without converting it. You cannot edit the project,
however, without converting it. To edit the project, you need to use
the Save Project As... command. The project is converted to
PHAWorks 5. Clicking on Save Project As... keeps the original
DOS-based project intact. The DOS-based project is converted to a
new PHAWorks project with a different name.

Getting Help
4
PHAWorks provides extensive online help to answer your questions
while you are using the software. There are several ways to access
online help:
! press F1 from anywhere in the program.
! select the Help menu and choose either Contents, Context Sensi-
tive or Search .
! click the Help button in a dialog box.
! click the Help icon ( ) on the toolbar.
The Help menu also contains a command to access the Glossary. The
PHAWorks Help feature uses the Windows help system. If you have
questions about using Windows help, refer to that documentation.
Accessing the Technique Tutorial
PHAWorks includes tutorials on each of the PHAWorks techniques

and can be accessed by selecting Technique Tutorial from the
PHAWorks Help menu. These technique tutorials are organized into
topics that you can read individually (by choosing topics from the
contents) or in sequence from beginning to end by choosing the browse
buttons (<< and >>).
Getting Technical Support
When you choose Contacting Primatech from the Help menu,

PHAWorks displays a dialog box with Primatechs mailing address,
phone numbers, Web address and e-mail address. You can use any of
these methods to contact a Primatech technical support representa-
tive.
Viewing the About Dialog Box
When you choose About from the Help menu, PHAWorks displays
the About PHAWorks dialog box.
This dialog box provides the programs copyright date, serial number
and licensing information. This information is required when calling
Primatechs technical support.

Closing Windows and Projects
4
To close a window, you can:
Click the close button.
or
Press CTRL+F4.
or
To close the current project, you can:
Choose Close Project from the File menu.

or
Choose the close button of the worksheet window.
or
Choose the Close command from the Window menu.
or
Choose the Close All command from the Window menu (which
also closes all other open windows associated with a particular
project).
You can also customize your PHAWorks toolbar to include Close (

), Close All ( ) or Exit ( ) icons.
To exit PHAWorks, choose Exit from the File command or press ALT+F4.

Chapter 5 PHAWorks
5
Tutorial
This chapter leads you through a brief tutorial of PHAWorks, and

targets some of the new programs features. The tutorial includes these
lessons:
Configuring new projects
Using the worksheet formats
Using the Quick Access feature
Creating a quick entry index
Creating a custom report
This tutorial is not intended to be an extensive or complete explana-

tion of every PHAWorks feature. Instead, by focusing on a few impor-
tant features of PHAWorks, we believe that you will become more con-
fident using the software, including those features not included in this
tutorial.
If you would like to see a technical tutorial, select Technique Tutorials
from the Help menu in PHAWorks. You can then choose an online
tutorial specific to the study technique you are using.
If you are new to Windows, you may want to consult the guided tour in
the Windows documentation before you start this chapter.
PHAWorks Tutorial 5-155

Lesson One: Configuring New
Projects 5
There are several configuration options that you can choose when first
creating a project. One of the most important options is setting the
column relationships. In this lesson, well create and configure a new
project.
Open PHAWorks, if its not already open. To create a new project,
follow these steps:
1. Choose the Create PHA submenu from the File menu.
2. Choose Initial PHA.
3. Make sure HAZOP (Traditional Study) study is selected and click

OK.
The Create New Project dialog box appears:
4. In the File Name text box, type TESTPHA5 and click Proceed.

A Please Confirm dialog box appears, asking whether you want
to use the default settings for the project configuration and column
configuration. 5
This feature lets you simplify the process of creating a new project
by choosing whether or not to use the programs default settings
for project and column configurations. If you want to use the de-
fault settings for project and column configurations, click Yes.
5. Click No for this tutorial, however, so that we can review the de-
fault settings for project and column configurations.
The TESTPHA5: Project Configuration dialog box appears:
6. Click Proceed to accept the default settings.

The TESTPHA5: Column Configuration dialog box appears:
Column relationships are extremely important for your study. Take

a moment to familiarize yourself with the available options for
your column configuration. We will accept the defaults for this
tutorial.

NOTE:
PHAWorks 5 provides you with the ability to change the column 5
relationships, during the creation of a new project as well as in
existing projects. Keep in mind, however, that changing column
relationships changes the hierarchical structure of entries in a
worksheet (that is, it affects the child-parent relationship of entries
across columns).
7. Click Finish.
A Please Confirm dialog box appears, asking you whether you
want to process protocols:
8. Click Yes.
A protocol is a list of questions about your project, your situation
and the process you are studying. If these protocol questions are
not required in your study, however, PHAWorks 5 gives you the
option of disabling this prompt. To disable the Protocols prompt,
go to the Preferences page in the Options dialog box under the
Utilities menu and deselect the Prompt for protocols option.
The TESTPHA5: Protocol PSI needed for PHA worksheet appears:

9. Place the mouse cursor in the A (answer) column at Question #1.
Type Yes.
5
10. Place the mouse cursor in the A column at Question #2. Type No.
11. Press TAB to move the cursor to the Justification column. Type
Diagram is still under development.

NOTE:
For more information about Protocols, see Chapter Two: Creat-
ing an Initial PHA.
5
12. Click the close button in the upper right corner of the protocol
worksheet window or choose Close from the Window menu to
close the window.
The TESTPHA5: Project Task Center appears:
The Project Task Center also appears when you open an existing
project, and gives you easy access to your project information and
options. All of its options are also available in the menu system.
For example, before you continue with the worksheet, you might
want to update the session list or the list of nodes. For now, were
going to copy some worksheet information from another project.
13. Select Copy from other project and click Go To....
The Choose Source Project dialog box appears:

5
PHAWorks prompts you to select a source project.

14. Select the example project named EXAMPLE.HPW and click Open.
(The file is in the <program> data directory.)
The Copy from EXAMPLE to TESTPHA5 dialog box appears:
15. To ensure you have plenty of worksheet information for subse-

quent lessons, select every check box in this dialog box. If any of
your copy selections is not necessary, a Please Note dialog box
will appear.
16. You will want to copy all nodes, parameters and worksheet
entries to the new project. Select Copy nodes/parameters (the
Choose button allows you to limit the items that are copied) and
Copy worksheet entries.
17. You also need quick entry lists for future lessons. Click Copy quick
entry lists. Notice that all the quick entry lists are selected by de-
fault.

NOTE:
When you copy information from other projects, some of that
information replaces items in the project you are copying to, while
5
other information merely appends items in the project you are
copying to. See Chapter 8, Changing Project Information, for a
list of which items are replaced and which are appended.
18. When you are finished making your selections in this dialog box,
click Copy.
A dialog box informs you when the copy is completed.
19. When this dialog box appears, click OK to return to the Project
Task Center.
20. Click the Tree button to view the results of your configuration
choices.
The projects Tree format window appears. Note that your data
has been copied into the project from the Example project.
21. Make sure TESTPHA5 is selected in the Tree. Select Expand All
from the Tree menu or click the Expand All icon ( ) in the tool-
bar. Note the expanded format of the Tree structure. Continue to
select Expand All from the Tree menu or click the Expand All icon
to continue expanding the Tree structure. Each click equals one
level of expansion at each level below the selected item.
Now, lets continue with Lesson Two: Using the Worksheet Formats to
learn how to use the different worksheet formats.

Lesson Two: Using the Worksheet
Formats 5
PHAWorks offers three worksheet formats, two of which you can use
for editing worksheet information. Youve already seen that the Tree
format is useful for viewing study information. You can also use the
Tree format to navigate between entries. Well explore this and other
aspects of the worksheet formats in this lesson.
Follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the TESTPHA5 project is the current project by
clicking on its title bar. Maximize it.
2. Select the node Cl2 vaporizer. (You will need to collapse the Tree
format so that you can view this node on the screen again.)
3. Choose the Change Window Format command from the Window
menu.
4. Select Spreadsheet Format.
The Spreadsheet format window appears.
In addition to the Spreadsheet window, a dialog box opens prompt-
ing you to choose a parameter for the project.
NOTE:
A Please Confirm prompt may appear asking you to select the
current session date
5. Make sure the parameter Flow is selected then click Proceed to

enter the worksheet.
The TESTPHA5: Node 3, Flow worksheet appears:

5
Take a moment now to familiarize yourself with the Spreadsheet

format. Note that node Cl2 vaporizer and parameter Flow now
appear in the worksheet banner and the other information we
copied from EXAMPLE.HPW now appears throughout the work-
sheet.
You can also switch between worksheet formats by using key-
board combinations. The next steps show you the available op-
tions. (These are the default accelerators for these keys. You can
define other keys if you want to.)
6. Press CTRL+I (to switch to the Datasheet format).

7. Press CTRL+H to switch to the Spreadsheet. Click on Impure C12
feed in the Causes column and press ENTER.
A new, blank Cause entry is created under the Impure Cl2 feed
5
entry.
8. Type Exit valve is in the OFF position, and press TAB to move the
mouse cursor into the Consequences column and type
Overpressurization of vaporizer.
9. Risk ranking can help you determine the relative seriousness of
the situation. Place the mouse cursor in the S (Severity) column.
The Severity pop-up legend window appears:
10. Type 3 in the S Column.

Move the cursor to the L (Likelihood) column.
The Likelihood pop-up legend window appears:
11. Type 2 in the L column.

PHAWorks automatically calculates the Risk Ranking and enters
the risk ranking value in the R (Risk) column.
12. Now tab back (you can use SHIFT+TAB) to the Exit valve is in the
OFF position entry, and select Datasheet Format from Change
Worksheet Format in the Window menu.
The worksheet now appears in its Datasheet format.

Notice that, even though youve switched worksheet formats, the
selected entry remains the same.
Also, note the numbering of the column entries. The Consequences
5
entry is a child of its parent entry in the Causes column because we
configured the project so that the Consequence column is related
to the Causes column.
As you can see, working with the worksheet formats is fairly easy.
Keep TESTPHA5 open and continue with Lesson Three: Using the Quick
Access Feature.

Lesson Three: Using the Quick
Access Feature 5
As you saw in the previous lesson, you can switch to the Tree format to
review the project or select a node. The Quick Access feature offers
another method to move to a different location in a project. This lesson
will show you how to browse all deviations (subsystems for other
project types) and immediately move to the selected deviation.
Follow these steps:
1. Press CTRL+H to switch back to the spreadsheet format.
2. Press CTRL+A or select Quick Access from the Navigate menu.
The Quick Access dialog box appears:
3. Expand Chlorine rail car (if it isnt already expanded), select

Lower Pressure, Less + Pressure and click Go To....
PHAWorks automatically switches to that section of the work-
sheet.
Thats all there is to it. As you start your own studies, you will find the
Quick Access feature a time saver.

Lesson Four: Creating a Quick Entry
Index 5
An easy way to insert entries into the worksheet is to use the quick
entry lists. These lists provide a welcome shortcut to typing common
entries into the worksheet, particularly if the same entry is repeated in
a worksheet column.
To learn more about quick entry lists and how to create a quick entry
list index, follow these steps:
1. Make sure TESTPHA5 is the current project.
2. Position the mouse cursor in the Consequences column and click
the right mouse button. This menu appears:
This is the worksheet function menu.

3. In this step, were going to choose the Quick Entry command from
the worksheet function menu. Click the right mouse button again
(if the worksheet menu is not visible), then click on Quick Entry.
(You could also press CTRL+E to open the quick entry list.)

The Global Quick Entry List Location dialog box appears:
4. Click on Create to create the Global Quick Entry database.

The Quick Entry list for the Consequences column appears:
There are three different levels of quick entry lists: column specific,
project specific and global. For instance, column-specific items
can be accessed from the Consequences column in any project.
Project-specific items are unique to that specific column and project.
Global items can be accessed from any text column in any project.
5. Double-click the first entry in the quick entry list under the
TESTPHA5 Consequences section.
The quick entry list dialog box disappears, and the new entry is
inserted below the current entry in the Consequences column.
6. Now move to the Safeguards column to explore the indexing fea-
ture of the quick entry list.
7. Press CTRL+E.

The Global Quick Entry List Location dialog box appears:
8. Click Index.
A message asks if you want to enable indexing.
9. Click Yes.
The quick entry list dialog box places all existing entries under a
folder called Section, as in the following illustration:
10. To add a new section to the index, click Add (make sure Section is
highlighted).
The following dialog box appears:

11. Type Valves for the name and click OK.
The new section Valves appears in the index with an empty entry
beneath it. Notice that the lists are sorted alphabetically:
5
12. Select <no entries> (if its not already selected), and click Add to
add an entry to the Valves section.
13. In the Add Entry dialog box, type Control Valve and click OK.
14. You can also collapse lists. Select Section under TESTPHA5: Safe-
guards and click Collapse.
The entries are hidden and the Section folder icon contains a plus
(+) sign. This feature is useful if you have several lists in an index.
15. Make sure Section is selected and click Rename. Type in a new
name for Section called Sample.
16. Click OK.
17. Highlight Sample and click Expand to show the entries again.
18. Click Close to close the Quick Entry list.
By now you should be more comfortable with both quick entry lists
and the index feature. In Lesson 5: Creating a Report, well explore the
reports feature.

Lesson Five: Creating a Report
5
Generating reports is an integral part of any study. This lesson will
demonstrate some of the options available in the PHAWorks report
feature using the TESTPHA5 project that we created earlier.
To practice configuring and generating reports, follow these steps:
1. Choose Reports from the Project menu.
The TESTPHA5: Reports dialog box appears:
Notice that all standard report types are listed in this dialog box
and are preceded by a solid diamond. You can also create your
own reports based on these standard types. An open diamond
denotes a user-defined report type. Were going to practice creat-
ing a user-defined report next.
2. Make sure that the Worksheet report is selected, and click Create
Copy.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
3. Click Yes.
4. In the Name for Copied Report dialog box, delete the word Work-
sheet and type Tutorial.

5
5. Click OK.
The new report appears in the list, preceded by an open diamond:
6. Make sure that the newly created report is selected and click the
Filters page to see the report filters for this type of report.
7. In the Filters dialog box, click Add.
This dialog box appears, showing you all the fields for which you
can specify filters:
Filtering allows you to specify what information you want to see

in a report. The next few steps illustrate how this works.

8. Select Causes and click OK.
A Text Filter dialog box appears, prompting you for information
about this particular filter:
5
9. Select the operator Contains and type Position in the Values: field.
Click OK to add the filter to the list of report filters. Notice that the
Use Filters check box is now marked. Click the Reports page to
return to the Reports dialog box.
At this point, you could send the report directly to the printer.
However, you may find it useful to preview the report to verify all
options and filters.
10. To see the report on the screen, click Preview.
The report appears in a Report Preview window:

Notice the buttons in the toolbar along the top of the window. This
toolbar also reports the current page and the range of pages being
previewed (in this case, page 1 of 3). 5
11. Move the cursor over the report and notice that the cursor changes
to a magnifying glass.
12. Click the left mouse button once.
The preview of the report enlarges.
13. You can also click the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons at the top of
the screen to change the magnification. Practice this a few times.
14. If you wish, click the Print icon ( ) to print all or part of the report.
15. Otherwise, click Close to exit the Reports dialog box.

Reviewing What Youve Learned
5
Now that youve finished these lessons, you should know how to:
Create a new project, which includes choosing a project type and
choosing project configuration.
Complete project Protocols.
Use the Tree format to view project data and switch between the
three worksheet formats with ease.
Change to another worksheet using the Quick Access feature.
Access quick entry lists and enable quick entry indexing.
Generate and preview a report.
While you were learning about these features, you also became more
proficient at:
Using the toolbar, the menus or keyboard combinations for a vari-
ety of PHAWorks functions.
Accessing function menus by clicking the right mouse button.
Editing worksheet lists.
Moving around in the worksheet and typing and inserting entries
in worksheet columns.
Congratulations! This completes your PHAWorks tutorial.

Chapter 6 Modifying
6
Worksheet and Program
Presentation
The topics in this chapter provide information about modifying the

configuration of the worksheet, the banner, the toolbar, and program
display fonts and colors. In the sections that follow, you will find
instructions for:
switching worksheet formats.
choosing columns displayed in the worksheet.
changing the width and the names of worksheet columns.
changing the relationships of columns.
modifying the banner.
configuring the toolbar.
changing the display fonts and colors.
Modifying Worksheet and Program Presentation 6-177

Switching Worksheet Formats
6
There are three worksheet formats available to you in PHAWorks. You
may find that you prefer to work in one format, or you may find it
useful to switch between worksheet formats as you conduct your study.
For example, you may switch to the Tree format on a regular basis to
refer to other nodes/systems in the study.
Its easy to switch between the worksheet formats using the shortcut
keys or clicking the worksheet icons in the toolbar:
Format Keys Icon
Spreadsheet CTRL+H
Datasheet CTRL+I
Tree CTRL+J
NOTE:
The accelerator keys in the table above are the default definitions.
You can change the accelerators to any key combination you want.
The Change Window Format submenu of the Window menu also con-
tains commands for switching between the formats:
NOTE:
Before you switch back to the Datasheet or Spreadsheet format
from the Tree format, you may want to select a worksheet entry so
you return to that specific entry in the selected column. If you
dont select an entry in the Tree format, PHAWorks will prompt
you for the required worksheet information.

Customizing the Worksheet
6
The worksheet has many columns, but it is unlikely that youll want to
view all of the available columns at once. You can select any combina-
tion of columns to be displayed in the worksheet, and you can define
five different worksheet views.
This section describes how to customize and select worksheet views.
Selecting a Worksheet View
To select an alternate combination of worksheet columns, follow these

steps:
1. Choose Worksheet Views from the Project menu.
or
Choose the Worksheet View icon ( ) from the toolbar.
or
Choose the Worksheet Views command from the column func-
tion menu (accessed by clicking the right mouse button on the
column heading).
The Worksheet Views dialog box appears:
This dialog box is organized into six views (groups of columns),

numbered 1 through 6. Note that by default, all views and all
column names are shown. Also note that view 6 always contains
all of the columns.
The right side of the list box shows the column names. A check
mark indicates that a column is included in a view.

NOTE:
Like most dialog boxes in PHAWorks, this one is resizable, so you
might want to make it large enough so that all of the columns are
6
visible without scrolling. To make a dialog box larger, click on a
corner or edge of a box and drag it to the desired size.
The Show: All views option shows all views and all available
columns in them. The Show: Current view option shows only the
selected view, and shows all available columns in that view. The
Show: Current columns option shows only those columns that
are active in the current view.
2. Click the view number button that indicates the view you want to
use and click OK.
You can also select one of the worksheet views directly from the work-
sheet. To do this, press CTRL+number, where number is the number of
the desired view, 1 through 6. Pressing CTRL+3 from the worksheet,
for example, immediately changes the display to worksheet view 3.
(These keys also work while you are in the Worksheet Views dialog
box.)
NOTE:
In PHAWorks 5, the worksheet views are saved within the project
itself. Selecting a view for one project will not affect another
project. The columns selected for a Worksheet View do not affect
any printed reports. The columns for a printed report are selected
independent of any Worksheet View you select. When you print
a worksheet (i.e., using the Print command in the File menu),
however, it uses the columns that are currently displayed.
Customizing the Worksheet Views

To customize a view, follow these steps:
1. Choose Worksheet Views from the Projects menu.
The Worksheet Views page appears.
2. Select the view number button of the view you want to change.
3. To add a column to the view, click on the graph square for that
column (a check mark appears), or select the column name in the
list and click Include. To remove a column from the view, click on
the graph square for that column (the check mark disappears), or
select the column name in the list and click Exclude.

Repeat step 3 for each column that you want to include or exclude.
You can select more than one column at a time. (If you dont know
how to select more than one item, refer to your Windows docu- 6
mentation.) You can also select All columns or None for a given
view. Before you accept your changes, however, you must select at
least one column in each view.
4. Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box (or click
Cancel to exit without saving the changes).

Modifying Worksheet Columns
6
The Worksheet menu provides three commands for modifying col-
umns: Increase Column Width, Decrease Column Width and Change
Column Name. In addition, commands in the column function menu
let you change entry numbering, hide columns, add or delete columns,
modify worksheet views, select maximum height for a column head-
ing and change column configuration. To access the column function
menu, point to a column heading with the cursor and click the right
mouse button. This menu appears:
This section provides step-by-step instructions for changing column

widths, names and numbering; for adding columns; for deleting col-
umns; for moving columns; and for changing column relationships.
In PHAWorks 5, all column settings, including views, widths, names
and positions, are saved within a project.
NOTE:
Not all of the following commands are available for all columns or
for all worksheet display formats.
Changing Column Widths

You can change column widths either with the mouse or the keyboard.
To resize columns with the mouse, follow these steps:
1. Move the cursor to the division between two column headings.
2. When the cursor changes to a double-headed arrow, left click and
drag the cursor to the right or left until the column is the desired
width.

6
Its also possible to resize columns with the keyboard. Select Increase
Column Width or Decrease Column Width from the Worksheet menu,
or use the default accelerators CTRL+ALT+= or CTRL+ALT+-.
Changing Column Names

PHAWorks lets you define column names that most accurately reflect
the specifics of your study.
In PHAWorks 5, when you rename a column, that column heading
(the column name) changes color to indicate that you are changing it.
To change a column name, follow these steps:
1. Choose the Change Column Name command from the column
function menu (right-click on the column heading).
or
Press F12
or
Select Change Column Name from the Worksheet menu.
The Rename Column dialog box appears:
This dialog box allows you to change the way the column heading is
displayed and the way the column heading name is referred to through-
out your project.

Depending upon the type of column you are naming, the dialog box
will contain either two or four of the following text boxes:
6
Text Box Description
Worksheet Heading This is the column name that appears in
the worksheet. Changing the Worksheet
Heading will not change the full Col-
umn Name.
Full Column Name This is the columns full name and may
differ from the Worksheet Heading. It is
usually a longer, more descriptive name.
Singular References This determines how singular references
to the column will appear elsewhere in
the worksheet.
Plural References This determines how plural references
to the column will appear elsewhere in
the worksheet.
2. Type the new column name into each of the text boxes.
3. Check the Save as default for new projects check box if you wish
to use these column names in subsequent studies you create.
NOTE:
You can select from predefined column names for each column by
clicking Predefined in the Rename column name Column
dialog box. Select a desired name and click OK to add it as a
column name.
Changing Entry Numbering

To change the entry numbering for an individual column, follow these
steps:
1. Access the column function menu for the column you wish to
modify.
2. Choose the Change Entry Numbering command from the column
function menu (right-click on the column heading).
3. A dialog box appears, from which you can select a numbering
scheme for the column.
4. After you select a new numbering scheme, click OK to accept the
selection and display it in the worksheet.
Changing the numbering may change the numbering for child
entries as well.

NOTE:
You can select either simple or cascade numbering for each column
in the list box (or manual numbering for the Recommendations
6
column). You can also choose to never restart numbering or to
restart numbering with each node/system, each worksheet or each
entry. For more information on the enhanced numbering scheme,
refer to the section on Setting Automatic Numbering in Chapter
8, Changing Project Information.
Hiding and Showing Columns in a View

To simplify a worksheet view, it is possible to hide or show (unhide)
specific columns. Follow these steps:
1. Point the cursor to the column heading you want to hide and click
the right mouse button.
The column function menu appears.
2. Select Worksheet Views.
The Worksheet Views dialog box appears:
3. Uncheck the column you want to hide or check the column you
want to show, and click OK.
You can also hide columns by choosing the Hide This Column com-
mand from the column function menu. This removes the column from
the current view.

Adding Columns to the Worksheet
PHAWorks 5 lets you add any type of column except REF# to a work-
6
sheet. (The REF# column, or Recommendation reference number col-
umn, provides unique information, so there can be no more than one
REF# column in a worksheet.)
NOTE:
As you go through the process of adding columns, each dialog box
contains tips that provide explanatory text to help guide you
through the process.
To add a column to a worksheet, follow these steps:

1. Select Column Configuration from the Project menu or the Project
Task Center.
The Column Configuration dialog box appears:
2. Select which column you want the new column to be added under
(i.e., select a Parent column for the new column).
3. Select Add Child.
The Add Child Column dialog box appears:

6
4. Select the type of column you want to add to the worksheet.

5. Click on Next.
You are prompted to provide information about the Worksheet
heading, Full name, Singular references and Plural references.
You must provide a worksheet heading and full name to proceed.
6. When youve filled in this information, click on Next.

You are prompted to provide a Column ID for the new column.
The column ID is user-defined and alphanumeric. It can have up
to 16 letters and numbers. You must define a column ID for any
user-created column to proceed.

6
7. When youve defined a column ID, click Next.

You are prompted to choose a position for the new column. Do this
by clicking on the location in the column hierarchy where you
want your column to be placed, by using the up and down
arrow keys, or by using drag-and-drop.
CAUTION:
After you have selected a columns position, you cannot move it
above its parent column.
8. When you have selected the column position, click Finish.

You return to the original Column Configuration dialog box and
can view the new column. (You may need to scroll down to see it.)
NOTE:
If you want to save the new column and its position as the default
for all new projects, select the Save as default for new projects
check box.

9. Click OK.
Deleting Columns from the Worksheet 6

PHAWorks 5 lets you delete columns from a worksheet.
NOTE:
There are exceptions to the column deletion feature. You cannot
delete the Guideword, Deviation, Causes and Recommendations
columns in HAZOP studies. Also, you cannot delete the root (first)
or Recommendations column from any study, nor can you delete
any column that has a descendant that cant be deleted, e.g., the
Consequences column when its the parent of the Recommenda-
tions column.
To delete a column from a worksheet, follow these steps:

1. Select Column Configuration from the Project menu or the Project
Task Center.
The Column Configuration dialog box appears:
NOTE:
Restore default column settings shipped with the software by
clicking on the Default button. This is only active when there are
no worksheet present.
2. Select the column you want to delete.

3. Select the Delete button.
CAUTION:
When deleting a column, some of the child columns that are
dependent upon it may also be deleted.

A confirmation dialog box appears:
4. Click Yes.
CAUTION:
When you delete a column, you delete all of the data in that
column. This function is different from hiding columns, which
simply turns a column off, or hides it from view, but doesnt delete
the column or its data.
Moving Columns
PHAWorks provides you with the ability to move a column in a work-
sheet, as well as change the column relationships after you enter work-
sheet data. The steps for this process are simple, but because changing
the relationship between columns can alter important information in a
worksheet, PHAWorks gives you several opportunities to halt the pro-
cess.
CAUTION:
After you change column relationships, PHAWorks cant reverse
project.
If you choose to move a column, follow these steps:

1. In the Column Configuration dialog box, choose the column you
wish to move.
2. Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the column
youve selected. You can also drag the column to a new location.
(If you use the drag-and-drop method, a bitmap ( ) appears if
you try to drop a column into a location in cant be moved to.) Be
careful not to drag the column above its parent column, because if
you drop the column under a different parent column, you will
change the column relationship.

Changing Column Relationships
To change column relationships, you must change a columns parent.

6
To change column relationships, follow these steps:
1. In the Column Configuration dialog box, select the column whose
parent relationship you want to change.
2. Click on the Parent button.
The Choose Parent for Column dialog box appears:
An asterisk indicates the current parent column.

3. Select the new parent column.
4. Click OK.
A confirmation dialog box appears, reminding you there are en-
tries, or data, in the column, and explaining that you will need to
review those entries if you go ahead with changing the column
relationship. It also reminds you that changing the columns back
to their original relationship does not completely undo the changes
to the worksheet entries.
click Yes. Otherwise, click No.
If you clicked Yes, a Please Note dialog box appears, stating that
entries in the column whose relationship you wished to change
are now associated with their new parent column, rather than
their previous parent column.
6. Click OK.
If you do not have a worksheet open, you are finished.

If you have a worksheet open, another dialog box appears, ex-
plaining that in order to change the column relationship in the
worksheet data, all worksheet and Tree format windows will be 6
closed.
7. Click OK.
The worksheet closes, leaving the Column Configuration dialog
box on the screen.
8. Click OK.
When you reopen the project worksheet, the new column relation-
ships are in place.
Another way to change a columns parent is to drag-and-drop a col-
umn to associate with a new parent. For example, you can drag the
Recommendations column up until it is under the Causes column.
To use this method, follow these steps:
1. Drag the selected column onto its new parent and drop it.
You are prompted to Change Relationship or to Cancel.
select Change Relationship. Otherwise, click Cancel. When you
drop a column on a new parent column, it is added as the last
child in the list. If you wish to change this position, see the Moving
Columns section above.
Follow steps 4 through 8 above.

Changing the Banner Configuration
6
To change the fields in your worksheet banner, follow these steps:
1. Choose Banner Configuration from the Project menu.
or
Right-click in a worksheet banner field and choose Configuration
from the banner function menu.
This dialog box appears:
The fields listed in this dialog box depend on the fields your project
uses, which is specified in the Project Configuration dialog box.
2. Click the check box of each field you wish to include in your work-
sheet banner.
If you select either of the Global Settings options (Use uppercase
labels or Combine drawings with this between them), those set-
tings are applied to the banner in all projects.
3. For fields that can have more than one line, type the maximum
number of lines that you wish to appear in the banner.
NOTE:
If you specify a maximum number of lines greater than one for a
banner field, additional lines of text will appear in the banner only
if there is enough text in the field to require it to use multiple
lines.

4. Click OK.
NOTE: 6
You can hide the banner by pressing F6. To show the banner, press
F6 again. You can also use the Show Banner command in the
Worksheet menu.
Changing Banner Names

To change the names of the fields in your worksheet banner, follow
these steps:
1. Click on the banner and place the cursor on the field you want to
rename.
2. Choose Rename Banner field from the Worksheet menu.
or
Right-click in the banner field you want to change and choose
Rename This Field from the banner function menu.
3. Uncheck the Use predefined name for this field check box.
4. Type a new banner name in the Name field. Click OK.
You can change back to the default banner name by checking the
Use predefined name for this field check box. Click Save as de-
fault for new projects if you want to use the new name in subse-
quent projects.

Changing the Font Size in Dialog
Boxes 6
PHAWorks 5 lets you change the font size of the type in the multiple
line edit fields in many of the dialog boxes. This feature is available for
the following edit fields:
Parameter Intention
Node Intention
Node/System
Node/System Notes
Subsystem/Parameter
Subsystem/Parameter Notes
Worksheet Notes
Rename Nodes/System/Parameter/Subsystem
Drawings
Drawing Details
Severity/Likelihood Definition
Project Identification (Purpose/Scope/Objective, Process and De-
scription/Chemicals)
NOTE:
The increase/decrease font buttons dont directly appear in the
Node/System, Drawing or Rename Node/System/Subsystem/
Parameter dialogs. To access the buttons in these dialogs, you
must access the Add or Rename dialog boxes.
To change the font size, follow these steps:

1. Select a dialog box by going to the Worksheet menu or by moving
the cursor to the banner field and clicking the right mouse button
to access the function menu.
For instance, select Node/System. The Node/System dialog box
of your choice appears.

The Add a Node dialog box appears.
3. Enter your comments or notes in the dialog box.

4. Click on the increase font button ( ) to make the entrys font larger,
or click on the decrease font button ( ) to make the entrys font
smaller.

Customizing the Toolbar
6
The toolbar is a convenient way to access various features. PHAWorks
5 includes toolbars that are specific to where you are in the program,
and it allows you to customize toolbars to include only those com-
mands you frequently use. You can also disable the toolbars entirely.
There are seven toolbars available in PHAWorks 5: Main, Format,
Project, Worksheet, Project Tree, Tools and Library. Each of these
contains icons for features that you might need when working in an
area of PHAWorks. You can select or deselect (disable) any of these
toolbars by using the Toolbars submenu under the Utilities menu:
If you want to change or customize a toolbar, the Toolbars page of the

Options dialog box (accessed through the Utilities menu) provides
many options for altering the appearance of toolbars in the worksheet.
You can also access the Toolbars page by selecting Customize in the
Toolbars submenu or by right-clicking on a toolbar.
This section provides step-by-step instructions for adding, inserting
and deleting icons, and for using the floating toolbars feature.
Adding Icons to a Toolbar
To add or insert icons to a toolbar, follow these steps:

1. Select Options from the Utilities menu and then the Toolbars
tab, or select Customize from the Toolbars submenu in the Utili-
ties menu.
The Toolbars page appears:

6
2. Select which toolbar you want to customize by choosing from the

drop-down list in the upper left-hand corner of the dialog box.
3. Select the icon (or multiple icons) you want to include from the
Available toolbar buttons: list on the left, which shows the icons
that are not currently included in the toolbar, and click Add. (You
can also add a separator, or line break, to the toolbar.)
When you click Add, the new icon will be positioned below the
icon you have highlighted in the Current toolbar buttons: list on
the right.
4. When you have finished adding, or inserting, icons, click OK. To
have your changes take effect without exiting the dialog box, click
Apply.
If you want to return to the toolbar configuration you had before
you made changes, click Reset before you click OK or Apply.
Removing Icons from a Toolbar
To delete an icon from the toolbar, follow these steps:

1. Select Options from the Utilities menu and then the Toolbars
tab, or select Customize from the Toolbars submenu in the Utili-
ties menu.
The Toolbars page appears.
2. Select which toolbar you want to customize by choosing from the
drop-down list in the upper left-hand corner of the dialog box.
3. Select the icon (or multiple icons) you want to delete from the Cur-
rent toolbar buttons: list on the right, and click Remove. (You can
also delete a separator, or line break, from the toolbar.)

4. When you have finished removing icons, click OK. To have your
changes take effect without exiting the dialog box, click Apply.
If you want to return to the toolbar configuration you had before
6
you made changes, click Reset before you click OK or Apply.
While a toolbar is visible, you can press SHIFT, then click on the icon
you want to delete and drag it off the toolbar.
Positioning Icons in a Toolbar

You can position an icon in its toolbar lineup by using one of four meth-
ods:
When a toolbar is visible, you can press SHIFT, then click on the
icon you want to reposition and drag it to its new location. You
can only reposition an icon within a toolbar. You cannot drag an
icon from one toolbar to another (this causes the icon to be re-
moved).
or
In the Toolbars dialog box, after you have added an icon to the
Current toolbar buttons list, you can use the Move Up and Move
Down buttons to reposition the icon.
or
In the Toolbars dialog box, after you have added an icon to the
Current toolbar buttons list, you can use drag-and-drop to reposi-
tion the icon.
Moving the Toolbars

In PHAWorks 5, the individual toolbars can be docked on any of
the sides of the program window, or they can float. In other words,
you can move them from their standard position at the top of the
program window.
To dock a toolbar, follow these steps:
1. Click on the small bar at the left edge of the toolbar.
2. Continue to hold the mouse button down, and drag the toolbar to,
and just beyond, a side or the bottom of the program window.
The toolbar docks either vertically at a side of, or horizontally at
the bottom of the program window.
To undock a toolbar, simply click on the small bar at the left again
and move the toolbar to a new docked position or a floating posi-
tion.
To return a toolbar to its last docked position, double-click on its
title bar.
To float a toolbar, follow these steps:
1. Click on the small bar at the left edge of the toolbar. 6
2. Continue to hold the mouse button down, and drag the toolbar to
a new position.
If you want to reposition a floating toolbar, click on the title bar
and drag the toolbar to a new location.
3. When the toolbar is in your desired location, release the mouse
button.
To return a floating toolbar to its default position at the top of the
program window, double-click on its title bar.
or
Click on the title bar, drag the toolbar to the top of the worksheet
and let go. The toolbar automatically inserts itself back into the
toolbar lineup.
Also, you can change a toolbars shape by clicking and dragging on its
frame.

Specifying Display Setup
6
The Display page of the Options dialog box lets you change how
PHAWorks displays various items in the worksheet and other win-
dows. To change your display setting, follow these steps:
2. Click the Display tab.
The Display page appears:
3. Select either the Standard or Alternate radio button to specify the

display configuration you wish to modify. For example, choose
Standard for the configuration you use in your daily work, or
choose Alternate for a special setup such as displaying the pro-
gram on a projection device.
4. The default list in this dialog box displays all the available items.
To display a list of protocol or worksheet items only, select the
appropriate option from the drop-down menu.
5. Select an item from the list (the table at the end of these instruc-
tions defines these items).
Some items need to share a font with similar items (e.g., worksheet
entries). In those cases, the general type is indicated with a folder
bitmap. The specific instances of that type (i.e., the current work-
sheet entry) are contained within that folder. The font for items
contained in the folder can be changed only by changing the font
of the folder item. You can still set the colors for each of the specific
items in the folder.

6. Choose either Font, Text Color or Background to open the Font or
Color dialog boxes.
NOTE:
6
The sections that follow provide only the basic information about
fonts and colors. If you need more information, refer to your
Windows documentation.
When you make changes to the font, text color or background, the
changes appear in the sample box, so that you can see the results
of the changes before you accept them.
7. To exit the Font or Color dialog boxes, click OK. To see your changes
without exiting the dialog box, click Apply.
The following table defines the display items that you can configure:
Item Definition
Worksheet Entry (current) The current entry in the worksheet
Worksheet Entry (related) The parent and child entries of the
current entry
Worksheet Entry (shadow) Text from a parent entry that is shown
at the top of the column as you scroll
through entries that are children of
the parent entry
Worksheet Entry (other) Any entry that is not a parent or child of
the current entry
Protocol Entry (current) The current entry in a protocol work-
sheet
Protocol Entry (related) The parent and child entries of the
current protocol entry
Protocol Entry (shadow) Text from a parent protocol entry that is
shown at the top of the column as you
scroll through entries that are children
of that parent
Protocol Entry (other) Any protocol entry that is not a parent
or child of the current entry
Banner Labels The names (or labels) of the banner fields
Banner Text The text that appears within a banner
field
Column Names The heading of each column in the
worksheet or protocol
Worksheet Description The text above the banner that indicates
an old revision is being shown or revis
ions are being compared

Item Definition
Project Notes Text in the Project Notes window 6
Library Text in a Library topic
Analysis Tools The text in an Analysis tools topic
Analysis Tools checklist items Items in a list within an Analysis
tools topic that are meant to be in-
serted into the worksheet
Selecting Fonts
After you select an item and choose the Font button, the Font dialog
box appears. The following table defines each of the selections in this
dialog box:
Selection Definition
Font Lists the available fonts, or typefaces (for example,
Times Roman or Arial)
Font Style Lists the available styles for the specified font. The
style of the font can be regular, italic, bold or bold
italic. (Some typefaces may not support all of these
choices)
Size Lists the available point sizes for the specified font.
Point sizes are a typographical measurement of text.
The larger the point size, the large the text appears
Effects Specifies whether the font should appear with
strikeout marks or underlines, and specifies the avail-
able colors for the font
Sample Shows a sample of how the text will appear with the
specified font settings
Script Lists the available language scripts for the specified
font. Choose the appropriate script for your computer
Click OK to accept the settings.

NOTE:
You can change the font attributes of text within worksheet entries
by highlighting the entry text you want to change, then selecting
from the various options in the Format menu. That formatting is
still based on the settings you specify in this dialog box. For more
information on changing the format of worksheet entry text, see
the section on Reformatting Text in the Worksheet in Chapter
7, Working with Data.

Selecting Text Colors
After you select an item and choose the Text Color button, the Color
6
dialog box appears. Follow these steps to select a text color:
1. To select a basic color, click on one of the colors shown in the Color
dialog box.
2. Click OK.
If you want to create a custom color, follow these steps:
1. Click the Define Custom Colors... button.
2. In the color refiner box, click in the area of the palette for your new
color.
3. To select a solid color that is closest to the new color, double-click in
the Color/Solid box.
4. To refine or change the new color you can also type values in the
Hue, Sat and Lum boxes, or change the values in the Red, Green
and Blue boxes.
5. When you are satisfied with your new color, click Add to Custom
Colors and click OK.
6. To use this new custom color, select it and click OK.
Selecting Background Colors
After you select an item and choose the Background button, the Color
dialog box appears. Follow these steps to select a background color:
1. To select a basic color, click on one of the colors shown in the Color
dialog box.
2. Click OK.
If you want to create a custom color, follow these steps:
1. Click the Define Custom Colors... button.
2. In the color refiner box, click in the area of the palette for your new
color.
3. To select a solid color that is closest to the new color, double-click in
the Color/Solid box.

4. To refine or change the new color you can also type values in the
Hue, Sat and Lum boxes, or change the values in the Red, Green
and Blue boxes. 6
5. When you are satisfied with your new color, click Add to Custom
Colors and click OK.
6. To use this new custom color, select it and click OK.

Chapter 7 Working with
7
Data
Chapter 6, Modifying Worksheet Presentation, contains topics regarding

the display of data, primarily the worksheet formats and views, and
the columns within those views. This chapter provides information
about entering and editing data in the worksheet, and includes in-
structions for:
editing lists (found in such dialog boxes as Steps, Systems or
Nodes).
modifying data in the banner.
modifying worksheet entries.
using quick entry lists.
creating references to other worksheets or entries.
creating revisions of worksheets.
tracking worksheet changes.
inserting links to other programs or documents.
Working with Data 7-206

Editing Lists (Dialog Boxes)
7
You can add, delete, duplicate, rename and move items in a list, as well
as copy and paste items to the clipboard and to word processing files.
When editing a list, follow these general procedures:
NOTE:
These instructions apply to the following dialog boxes: Nodes,
Steps, Systems, Parameters, Subsystems, Categories, Components,
Drawings, Documents, Guidewords, Sage, Deviations, Library and
Quick Entry.
1. Access the list you want to edit.

2. Make sure the editing buttons are revealed (by clicking >>) or click
the right mouse button inside the list box to access the function
menu. Heres an example of a function menu:
Not all dialog boxes have the same functions. For example, some
dialog boxes list items alphabetically, and items within these lists
cant be moved.
3. Make the desired modifications to the list by clicking the buttons or
choosing the commands from the function menu. (You can also use
the shortcut key combinations as shown in the function menu or on
the buttons.)
4. To choose an item from the list, select it and click OK (or Proceed, as
when youre selecting worksheet information). If you want to re-
turn to the worksheet without choosing a new item, click Back.
(Selecting Back also saves any changes to the list.)
The following sections provide instructions for each editing task (and
assume the editing buttons have already been revealed as described in
the general procedures given above).

Adding a New Item to a List
7
To add a new item to a list, follow these steps:
1. Choose the Add button, choose Add from the function menu or
press ALT+A.
The Add dialog box appears.
NOTE:
Some dialog boxes also let you add more than one item at a time by
choosing Add Many from the function menu.
2. Type the new item name.

3. Select the End or the Current position radio box to determine where
in the list the new item will appear (this option will not appear in
lists that are arranged alphabetically such as the Sage Database).
Press ENTER (or click OK). Depending on the type of entry you are
adding, the text can be longer than a single line.
The new item appears in the list. To change the location of the item
in the list, refer to the section entitled Moving an Item in a List.
Deleting an Item from a List

To delete an item from a list, follow these steps:
1. Select the item to be deleted.
2. Choose the Delete button, choose Delete from the function menu,
press ALT+D or press F3.
A message asks you to confirm that you want to delete it.
3. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
PHAWorks deletes the item and if the item is numbered, renum-
bers all affected items.
You can also delete multiple items by holding the SHIFT key and se-
lecting the items you want to delete, then choosing the Delete button,
etc.
Renaming an Item in a List

To change the name of an item in a list, follow these step:

1. Select the item you want to rename.
2. Choose the Rename button, choose Rename from the function 7
menu or press ALT+R.
The Rename dialog box appears.
NOTE:
Instead of a Rename button, some dialog boxes have a Details
button that opens the Details dialog box. To rename these items,
type the new name in place of the old name.
3. Type the new name and press ENTER or click OK.

The new name appears in the list.
Duplicating an Item Within a List

In the Nodes, Systems, Subsystems, Categories, Steps, Drawings, Sage,
Master Team List and Library dialog boxes, you can make duplicates
of an item within the list itself.
To duplicate and rename an existing item, follow these steps:
1. Select the item to be copied.
2. Click Duplicate. (In the Library Topics dialog box, click Copy.)
If you are in the Nodes, Systems, Subsystems, Categories, Steps or
Drawings dialog box, the Copy Node (or System/Subsystem/
etc.) dialog box appears.
3. If you want the duplicate node to be listed under the original node,
select Add at: Current position. If you want it to be placed at the
end of the list, select Add at: End.
4. Click OK.
PHAWorks adds a duplicate of the item to the list.
5. To rename the duplicate, click Rename, type the new name in the
Rename Node dialog box and press ENTER or click OK. (This
option is not available in the Library Topics dialog box.)
In some dialog boxes, a confirmation dialog box appears, asking
whether you want to make a copy of the selected item. In others, a
dialog box indicates that the list must be in edit mode to make a dupli-
cate, and asks whether you want to switch to edit mode. Simply click
Yes or OK, depending upon the dialog box.

NOTE:
When duplicating nodes, systems, subsystems, categories, steps,
drawings and components in Sage, PHAWorks copies all of the
7
data associated with the item.
To move an item, refer to the section titled Moving an Item in a List.
Copying and Pasting an Item in a List

In the Nodes, Systems, Subsystems, Categories, Steps, Drawings, Sage
and Master Team List dialog boxes, you can copy items in a list to the
clipboard in addition to making duplicates of items. You can also copy
items in a list to the clipboard in the Components and Quick Entry
dialog boxes. This makes the item available to paste into another pro-
gram.
NOTE:
Copying an item is different from duplicating it. When you
duplicate an item (e.g., a node), all of its data is duplicated. But
when you copy and paste an item, only its name is copied, none of
its data is copied.
To copy an existing item in a list to the clipboard, follow these steps:

2. Select the item (or items) to be copied.
3. Click the Copy icon or press CTRL+C.
PHAWorks copies the selected item, and a message verifies the
number of items copied to the clipboard.
You can also copy items from another program and and paste into a
list. For example, you can copy a list of nodes from a word processing
document and paste it into the Nodes dialog box.
Moving an Item in a List

To change the location of an item in the list, follow these steps:
2. Select the item you wish to move.

3. Drag the item to the new place in the list. (To drag an item means to
point to an item, click the left mouse button, and continue to press
the mouse button while you move the cursor to a new location.) 7
PHAWorks displays a confirmation message (unless this confir-
mation has been disabled in the Preferences page of the Options
dialog box).
PHAWorks moves the item and renumbers all affected items (if
necessary).

Using the Banner
7
The banner fields display information such as systems or nodes for the
current worksheet. You can modify this information as you work on
your project, moving between the banner and the worksheet columns
as often as you like.
The banner function menu contains commands pertaining to the ban-
ner fields. Like the column or worksheet function menus, this menu is
accessed by placing the cursor inside a banner field and clicking the
right mouse button. Here is an example of a banner function menu:
The following sections provide more information about how to use the
banner fields, accessing worksheet lists from the banner, modifying
the banner configuration and zooming banner fields.
Moving Between Banner and Worksheet

To access the banner after opening a worksheet, do one of the follow-
ing:
Click on a banner field (or right-click on a banner field if you want
to access the banner function menu).
or
Press CTRL+B. (This key combination takes you to the first banner
field or to the banner field you were last editing.)
or
Choose the Edit Banner command in the Worksheet menu

To return to the worksheet, do one of the following:
Click a worksheet column. 7
or
Press CTRL+W.
or
Choose the Return to Worksheet command in the Worksheet
menu.
Return to your previous location in the worksheet by pressing CTRL+W

or choosing Return to Worksheet.
Hiding the Banner
At times when youre entering or editing large portions of text in the

worksheet, you may want more room in the PHAWorks project win-
dow. You can do this by temporarily hiding the banner.
To hide the banner:
Press F6.
or
Choose the Show Banner command in the Worksheet menu.
(When the banner is hidden, the check mark next to the command
disappears.)
To show the banner again:

Press F6.
or
Choose the Show Banner command in the Worksheet menu.
(When the banner is visible, a check mark appears next to the
command.)
Using the Banner to Access Worksheet Lists
To go to another node, system, or step of a project, you can choose a

new item from a banner field. You can also access the node, system or
step from the banner if you want to modify these lists. To access these
lists from the banner, do the following:

1. Access the banner function menu.
2. Choose the command that pertains to the information you wish to 7
select. (You can also double-click on the field, or you can press
CTRL+B, tab to the field of interest and press ENTER.)
The dialog box for the item you wish to select appears.
3. Choose a new item from the list or edit the list as needed. (You may
also be prompted for additional worksheet information, depend-
ing on which field youve selected and how you have configured
your study.)
Zooming In and Out in Banner Fields
When the text in a banner field exceeds the maximum number of lines
a field is configured to display, you can zoom the field to show all of
the text. For example, if a banner field is configured to display a maxi-
mum of two lines, but the item currently in the field is six lines long,
you can zoom the field to display the entire entry.
If text in a banner field exceeds the configured maximum number of
lines, a bitmap appears before the banner text, indicating that not all
the text is displayed, as shown below:
When you click this icon, the field expands to show all of the entries.
To collapse the field, click the icon again.
You can also zoom the field by doing the following:

1. Select the field you want to reduce or enlarge.
2. Choose the Zoom This Field command from the banner function
menu.
The field remains this size until you select the field and choose the
Zoom This Field command again.

Hiding Banner Fields
7
This option allows you to remove a field from view in the worksheet
banner. To hide a field:
1. Place the cursor on the field you want to hide and right-click to
access the banner function menu.
2. Click Hide This Field.
Renaming Banner Fields
This option allows you to rename the banner fields. To rename a field
in the banner:
1. Select Rename This Field from the banner function menu or the
Worksheet menu, or select Banner Field Names from the Project
menu and click Change.
The Rename Banner Field dialog box appears:
2. Remove the check from the Use predefined name for this field
check box, then type in the new name.
3. Check the Save as default for new projects check box if you wish
to use this name in subsequent projects.
4. Click OK.
Converting Banner Labels to Uppercase
The Upper-Case Labels option allows you to display the letters in the
banner labels in all capital letters. To do this, follow these steps:
1. Place the cursor in the banner and right-click to access the banner
function menu.
2. Click Use Upper-Case Labels.

You can also show banner labels in uppercase letters by accessing the
Banner Configuration dialog box from the Project menu and selecting
Use upper-case labels. 7
Combining Drawings with Separators
The Combine drawings with this between them: option allows you to
choose what separator youd like to use when listing more than one
drawing in the Drawings line.
1. Place the cursor in the banner and right-click to access the banner
function menu.
2. Click Configuration.
or
Access the Banner Configuration dialog box from the Project menu.
3. Click Combine drawings with this between them: and type in
whatever separator you wish to use, e.g., a comma. The default
separator is a semicolon.

Modifying Worksheet Entries
7
The Worksheet menu provides one way to access lists such as the
Node list. The Entry submenu of the Worksheet menu also provides
several commands for joining, splitting, deleting, inserting and mark-
ing entries. These commands can also be accessed by right-clicking in
a worksheet column:
This menu is called the worksheet function menu. The following sec-
tions provide instructions for using both the Entry submenu and the
worksheet function menu to access the commands for modifying work-
sheet entries.
NOTE:
You can undo or redo a task within any worksheet window by
selecting Undo or Redo under the Edit menu, or by pressing
CTRL+Z for Undo or CTRL+SHIFT+Z for Redo.
Selecting Entries
You select a single entry in a worksheet column by clicking on it. (To
select only a portion of an entry, click and drag.) You can copy, delete
or move more than one entry at a time. To select multiple worksheet
entries with the mouse, click and drag the mouse cursor until a selec-
tion box appears:

Continue to drag the selection box until all desired entries have been
selected.
7
You can also choose the Select Entry, Select Column, or the Select
Worksheet command from the Edit menu.
After you select the entries, you can delete, cut or copy the selection.
The Cut, Copy and Paste commands in the worksheet function menu
work like the standard Windows cut, copy and paste functions and
work with selected text or selected entries. These commands are de-
scribed in more detail in Chapter 4, PHAWorks Basics.
You can also format entries using the commands in the Format menu,
or insert entry notes, using the Add Entry Note... command in the entry
function menu.
Joining Entries
The Join Entries command combines two consecutive worksheet en-

tries into one entry. The joining takes place between the current entry
and the one that immediately follows it.
To join two entries in a worksheet, follow these steps:
1. Select the first of the two entries that are to be joined.
2. Choose Join entries from the Entry submenu of the Worksheet
menu or worksheet function menu.
If the entries you have selected have child entries, PHAWorks asks
you to confirm that you want to join the selected entries and their
children.
CAUTION:
Joining child entries means that the entries associated with the
second entry become children of the first entry. After you join
entries and their child entries, splitting the entry will not restore
the children to the second entry. You can, however, use the Undo
command in the Edit menu immediately after joining the entries.
3. To confirm your choice, click Yes.

PHAWorks joins the entries (and the entries children) and auto-
matically renumbers affected entries.

Splitting Entries
7
The Split Entry command divides a single entry into two entries. This
is different from pressing CTRL+ENTER, which inserts a line break
within an entry (that is, the entry remains a discrete unit).
To split an entry in a worksheet, follow these steps:
1. Position the text cursor where you want to split the entry. The
entry is split at the location of the text cursor, so you must position
the cursor before choosing the Split Entry command.
2. Choose Split Entry from the Entry submenu of the Worksheet menu
or worksheet function menu.
The entry is divided in two, and PHAWorks automatically renum-
bers affected entries.
NOTE:
Splitting an entry does not also split that entrys children. The
child entries remain associated with the entry that was located
above the text cursor before the split.
Inserting Entries
When you press ENTER to add a new entry, the new entry always
appears after the current entry. The Insert Entry command or F4 lets
you insert an entry before an existing entry in a worksheet column.
This is especially useful if you want a new entry to be the first child of
a parent entry.
NOTE:
The terms child and parent refer to text that is related hierarchi-
cally across columns. If you attempt to create a child entry, you
may receive a warning that a parent entry is required.
To insert an entry, follow these steps:

1. Place the text cursor where you want the new entry to appear.
2. Press F4 (or choose the Insert Entry command).
PHAWorks inserts a blank entry, ready for you to type the new
information.

Deleting Entries
7
To delete an entry, follow these steps:
1. Select the entry to be deleted.
2. Press F3 or the DELETE key.
All entries dependent on the selected entry can be deleted or re-
main in the worksheet. A message asks if you want the deletion to
include them.
3. Click Yes to delete the selected area. If you dont want to delete the
selected area, click No (or press ENTER). The default setting is No.
You can delete multiple entries by selecting the entries you want to
delete and pressing F3 or the DELETE key.
Copying Noncontiguous Entries
You can copy multiple, noncontiguous entries from a worksheet.

To do this, follow these steps:
1. Press the CTRL key while using the mouse to click on the entries
you want to copy.
2. When you have selected all of the items you want to copy, go
under the Edit menu to Copy, or press CTRL+C. The Copy to Clip-
board dialog box appears, asking you to confirm that you wish to
copy the selected worksheet entries to the clipboard.
3. If you want to copy only the selected entries, click Yes. If you want
to copy the selected entries and their children entries, click All. Or,
if you dont want to copy the selected entries, click No to cancel the
command.

Searching for Text
Use the Find command to search for text in the worksheet data in a 7
project. PHAWorks allows you to search for multiple words or phrases
at the same time.
To search for text, follow these steps:
1. If you dont want to begin your search at the beginning of the
project, position the text cursor where you want the search to be-
gin.
2. Choose Find from the Edit menu or worksheet function menu or
press CTRL+F.
The Find dialog box appears:
3. Type the text you want to search for in the Find what text field. If
you want to search for more than one word or phrase, separate
each entry with a comma (for example: Search text 1, search text 2,
search text 3). Use quotation marks to find phrases with commas
or with leading or trailing spaces (for example Columbus, OH
or material).
This dialog box also lets you indicate:
if the text to be found should match the case as typed.
if you want the search to begin at the current text cursor
position or from the top of the project.
if the scope of the search is the current column (only the
column in which youve placed the text cursor), all
active columns (the columns that currently appear in
the worksheet view youve selected) or all columns
(even if columns arent currently included in the
worksheet view).
4. Click Find Next to initiate the search.
Additional occurrences of the text can be found by clicking the
Find Next button. This dialog box will remain open. This means
that you can temporarily enter the worksheet to edit text, and then
return to the Find dialog box to continue the search.

By default, the Find dialog box moves so that you can see the
found text (that is, so that the Find dialog box does not cover up the
found text). If you want the Find dialog box to stay in the same 7
position, select the Lock Pos. check box.
NOTE:
If the search engine locates a word or phrase in a column that is
not part of the current worksheet view, it automatically makes that
column active. An asterisk (*) appears next to the column, indicat-
ing that it was activated automatically during the search process.
If you wish, you can add this column to the worksheet view and
Replacing Text in the Worksheet

The Replace command lets you search the current column or the entire
worksheet for specified text and replace it with new text.
Follow these steps:
1. Position the text cursor where you want to begin the search.
2. Choose Replace from the Edit menu or worksheet function menu.
The Replace dialog box appears:
3. Type the text you want to search for in the Find what text field. If
you want to search for more than one word or phrase, separate
each entry with a comma (for example: Search text 1, search text 2,
search text 3). Use quotation marks to find phrases that include
commas or with leading or trailing spaces (for example Colum-
bus, OH or material).
4. Type the new text in the Replace with text field.

This dialog box also lets you indicate:
if the text to be found should match the case as typed. 7
if you want the replacements to begin at the current text
cursor position or from the top of the project.
if the scope is the current column (only the column in
which youve placed the text cursor), all active columns
(the columns that currently appear in the worksheet view
youve selected) or all columns (even if columns arent
currently included in the worksheet view).
5. Click Find Next.
When PHAWorks finds the first occurrence, you have the option
of making the replacement by clicking the Replace button, or leav-
ing the text as is and moving to the next occurrence by clicking
Find Next. You can also click Replace All, which replaces all
occurrences of the text to be found with the new text without
prompting you for your approval.
By default, the Replace dialog box moves so that you can see the
replaced text (that is, so that the Replace dialog box does not cover
up the replaced text). If you want the Replace dialog box to stay in
the same position, select the Lock Pos. check box.
NOTE:
not part of the current worksheet view, it automatically makes that
column active. An asterisk (*) appears next to the column, indicat-
ing that it was activated automatically during the search process.
If you wish, you can add this column to the worksheet view and
Reformatting Text in the Worksheet

You can change the text format within worksheet entries in the Spread-
sheet or Datasheet views. You can change the size of text in a work-
sheet entry, and you can make text italic, bold and underlined, as well
as superscript or subscript. You can do this by using the Format menu,
by right-clicking on an entry, by using the keyboard or by clicking on
the appropriate toolbar icon.
NOTE:
When you make text format changes in the Spreadsheet or
Datasheet views, those changes are also reflected in the Tree view.

You can select one entry, multiple entries or text within an entry to
change the format. To change the format of text, follow these steps:
7
1. Select the text you wish to format.
2. Click on the Format menu to open it, or click on the toolbar icon for
the attribute you want.
3. Select the format option you want by clicking on it.
You can select any of the format styles from the toolbar if you have
added all of the formatting icons to the toolbar. (Bold, italic and under-
line are default icons.) See the Customizing the Toolbar section of Chap-
ter 6, Modifying Worksheet Presentation for more information.
You can also select some of the format styles by using the following
keystrokes:
Format Keys
Normal CTRL+SHIFT+N
Bold CTRL+SHIFT+B
Italic CTRL+SHIFT+I
Underline CTRL+SHIFT+U
Superscript CTRL+SHIFT+S
NOTE:
If you increase the font size using the text formatting commands,
then increase the font size of all worksheet entries, the text you
changed previously remains larger than the other entries. For
example, if you highlight one word and click the increase font
button once (which increases the font size by 20 percent), and you
then use the Display options to increase the font size of all entries
in the worksheet, the font size of the original word that you
changed remains 20 percent larger than the rest of the entries.

Entry Notes
7
Entry notes allow you to add and access information that is pertinent
to a specific entry, but that does not belong in the entry itself.
Adding an Entry Note
To add an entry note, follow these steps:

1. Right-click on the entry to which you want to add a note, or choose
the Entry submenu from the Worksheet menu and select Add/Edit
Entry Note....
The worksheet function menu appears.
2. Select Add Entry Note....
The Entry Notes dialog box appears:
3. Type the information into the field and click OK.

An Entry Note indicator appears to the left of the worksheet entry.
Viewing an Entry Note
To view an entry note, point and left-click on its note indicator and
continue to hold the mouse button down. The text of the entry note
appears in a tip box (similar to the pop-up tips for icons and other
dialog box items):

7
Editing an Entry Note
To edit an entry note, follow these steps:

1. Double-click the entry note indicator.
or
Choose the Entry submenu from the Worksheet menu and select
Add/Edit Entry Note....
or
Right-click on the entry to which you want to add a note.
The worksheet function menu appears.
2. Select Edit Entry Note....
The Entry Notes dialog box appears, allowing you to edit the note
text.
NOTE:
You can delete all notes from the project by removing the checkbox
next to the required item.

7
A quick entry list is available for nearly every column of the worksheet.
Instead of typing the same entry data over and over again, you can
quickly select entry text from a list. Including an entry from the quick
entry list is as easy as a few keystrokes or clicks of the mouse.
There are three different levels of quick entry lists: global, column spe-
cific and project specific. The Quick Entry dialog box, by default, shows
the following quick entry lists:
The list labeled <Global> contains global entries. These entries are
available for all columns in all projects.
The next list contains entries that are specific to a column (the col-
umns share like information, such as <Global: Consequences>)
but are not specific to a project. These entries are available to all
projects that contain the selected column.
The final list in the dialog box is for entries that are specific to both
column and project (for example, <EXAMPLE: Consequences>).
This is an example of a quick entry list:
Configuring Quick Entry Lists
You have the option of using both global and project-specific lists, just
one type of list, or neither. You choose the quick entry lists for a project
in the Project Configuration dialog box. To change the configuration,
follow these steps:
1. Access the Project Configuration dialog box.

7
2. Select the check boxes of the lists you want to appear in the Quick
Entry dialog box (make sure they contain check marks). Deselect
the check boxes of the lists you do not wish to appear in the dialog
box.
3. Click OK.
Accessing Quick Entry Lists

To access a quick entry list, follow these steps:
1. Select the column for which you wish to see the quick entry list
(click it or tab to it) and place the cursor where you want text to be
inserted.
2. Press CTRL+E, choose Quick Entry from the worksheet function
menu or click the quick entry list icon ( ) from the toolbar.
For some columns (such as the BY column), the quick entry list shows
both an abbreviation and its definition. When you choose the entry,
only the abbreviation is inserted into the column. The definition is
used for titles in Individual Action Items, Individual Information Needs
and User reports.
NOTE:
If you want the Quick Entry dialog box to appear in the same
position each time you open it, click the Lock Pos. check box.

Inserting Text from a Quick Entry List
You can select one or more entries from a quick entry list to be inserted
7
in a worksheet column. To insert text into the worksheet from a quick
entry list, follow these steps:
1. Place the text cursor where you want to insert a new entry.
2. Access the quick entry list for that column.
3. Select the entry (or entries) to be copied from the quick entry list
and click OK. (To select more than one entry, press CTRL and click
each entry or drag the mouse to select contiguous entries.)
PHAWorks copies the item(s) to the worksheet below the current
entry.
Using Default Quick Entry Lists

Generally, you can use Global Quick Entry lists to create a set of com-
pany standard quick entry lists to be used on projects. You may, how-
ever, want to predefine a set of such lists that are not Global Quick
Entry lists.
To set up default quick entry lists, follow these steps:
1. Create a new project and assign it an easily identifiable name (for
example, DEFAULTS).
2. Type the default entries in the quick entry lists for each column.
To copy the default quick entry lists into a project, follow these steps:
1. Create or open the project into which you wish to copy the default
lists.
2. Choose Copy From Other Project from the Project menu.
PHAWorks prompts you for the source project.
3. Choose the project that includes the desired quick entry lists (for
example, DEFAULTS).
CAUTION:
Copying quick entry lists from another project overwrites any
existing quick entry lists in the current project.
4. To copy the default lists to the new project, click Copy quick entry
list in the Copy From dialog box. All Quick Entry lists are selected
by default.

5. Select only the Quick Entry list you want to copy.
6. Click Copy. 7
PHAWorks copies the lists from the source project to the current
project, and a dialog box informs you when the copying is com-
plete.
7. Click OK.
Adding a Quick Entry Item to a List

To add an entry to a list, follow these steps:
1. Access the quick entry list.
2. Select an entry in the appropriate section.
3. Click Add, choose Add from the function menu or press ALT+A.
If the Quick Entry list is not in edit mode, a dialog box appears
asking whether you want to switch to edit mode.
4. Click Yes.
The Add an Entry dialog box appears:
5. Type the entry and choose whether you want it to be added at the
End or in the Current position.
6. Click OK or press ENTER.
The new entry appears in the position you indicated.
Deleting a Quick Entry Item from a List

To delete an entry from a list, follow these steps:
2. Select the quick entry item you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, choose Delete from the function menu, press ALT+D
or press F3.

A message asks you to confirm that you want to delete the list.
4. Click Yes or press ENTER. 7
Printing Quick Entry Lists
You can print the contents of a quick entry list by clicking the Print
button. The printed list is identified by its column name (for example,
Quick Entry - Consequences).
Changing the Location of the Global Quick

Entry List Database
As with the Sage, Master Team list and Library features, you might
want to have only one database of global entry lists that you use for all
your projects, several global lists that apply to different facilities or
different locations, or a single database that you share over a network.
By default, the database for global Quick Entry lists is located in the
Data directory of your PHAWorks directory. To change the location,
follow these steps:
2. Click the Locations tab.
The Locations page appears:

3. Type the new directory for the Global Quick Entry lists or click the
Browse button to select a directory from your system.4.
7
4. Click OK.
Using the Quick Entry List Index
The index feature of the Quick Entry dialog list means that you can
have more than one section in each Quick Entry dialog box and ar-
range entries within the various sections.
The index is not enabled automatically, and you must enable the index
feature for each columns quick entry list independently. This section
includes steps for enabling the index, working with the sections in the
index and disabling the index.
Enabling an Index
To enable an index for a quick entry list, follow these steps:

1. Select the column for which you wish to enable the index (click it
or tab to it).
2. Press CTRL+E, or choose Quick Entry from the worksheet func-
tion menu or click the quick entry list icon from the toolbar.
3. Select the list you wish to be indexed (Global, Global: Column or
Project: Column).
4. In the Quick Entry dialog box, click Index.
A message asks if you want to enable indexing.
5. Click Yes.
6. Click Yes.
The quick entry list dialog box places all existing entries in a section as
in the following illustration:

7
The entries are, as before, what you can insert into a worksheet column.
The section is the heading for a group of entries. When you first enable
an index, PHAWorks creates a section with the name of the selected
column, but you can create new sections and rename sections at any
time.
To collapse a section, make sure the name of the section is selected and
click Collapse. When a section is collapsed, a plus sign (+) appears
next to the name, and all of the entries in a section are hidden.
If you enable the index for a quick entry list, but you currently have no
entries in the dialog box, PHAWorks automatically adds an empty
section to the dialog box, as shown in the following illustration:
In this dialog box, you can add, delete or rename sections or entries in
sections just as you would without the indexing feature turned on,
with one exception. If you select a section and click Add, the Add a
Section to <column> dialog box appears. If you select an entry and
click Add, the Add an Entry dialog box appears. Subsequent sections
describe procedures for adding, deleting and renaming sections.

Adding a Section to an Index
To add a section to an index, follow these steps:

7
2. Select the column to which you want to add a section.
3. Click Add or choose Add from the function menu.
4. Click Yes.
The Add a Section to <column> dialog box appears:
5. Type the name for the list and click OK or press ENTER.
As you add more sections to the index, notice that the quick entry
dialog box sorts the sections alphabetically. After you create a section,
you can edit it just as you would any other list.
Deleting a Section from an Index
To delete a quick entry section from an index, follow these steps:

NOTE:
The top-level sections in an index, i.e., the <Global>, <Global:
Column> and <Project: Column> sections, cannot be deleted.

2. Select the quick entry section you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, choose Delete from the function menu or press F3.
A message asks you to confirm that you want to delete the list.

CAUTION:
If there are any entries in the section you want to delete, they will
be deleted along with the section.
7
4. Click Yes or press ENTER.
Renaming a Section in an Index
To rename a quick entry section in an index, follow these steps:

2. Select the quick entry section you want to rename.
3. Click Rename, choose Rename from the function menu or press
ALT+R.
The Rename Quick Entry List Section dialog box appears:
4. Click Yes or press ENTER.

Referencing Worksheet Items
7
As you enter information into the worksheet, you may find that you
duplicate information in one or more worksheets. Inserting references
in worksheet entries allows you to refer to a source of information
without having to retype the text.
NOTE:
To create references, you must enable referencing through the
Automatic Numbering dialog box. For more information about this
feature, refer to the Setting Automatic Numbering section of
The referencing and automatic numbering features ensure that when

you mention a node, system, step or entry by number, that reference
will be updated whenever the source is updated.
When the source of a reference is deleted, all references to it will be
replaced by a question mark to indicate an unresolved reference. Sup-
pose, for example, that you delete system 3 from a project. In that case,
all references to system 3 will appear as system ?. For example, the
reference Systems 1 and 3 will become Systems 1 and ?.
This section provides information about how to create references, both
manually and through the PHAWorks Create Reference feature.
NOTE:
If you want the Create Reference dialog box to appear in the
same position each time you open it, click the Lock Pos. check
box.
Creating References
To create a reference, follow these steps:
1. Select the entry in which you wish to insert a reference.
NOTE:
Entries can contain either text or a reference, not both. If there is
currently text in an entry, you will be asked if you want to replace
it.
2. Select the Entry submenu from the Worksheet menu and then
choose the Create Reference command.

The Create Reference dialog box appears:
3. From the Create Reference dialog box, select the radio button for
the kind of reference you wish to create: See, Same as, As for or
Refer to.
4. Select a target item from the drop-down list box (such as nodes,
systems, steps or current column). The possible values for the tar-
get selected appear in the text field just below the list box.
5. Select the item that you wish to reference and click Include or
place a check mark next to the item. You can include more than
one item in a reference.
6. When you have finished selecting items to be referenced and are
ready to insert the reference into the worksheet entry, click OK.
If you selected a worksheet entry that already contains text,
PHAWorks asks you to confirm that you want to replace the cur-
rent text with the reference.
The reference then appears in the worksheet as underlined text. Double-
clicking that underlined text takes you to the reference if there is only
one, or generates a reference list dialog box if there are multiple refer-
ences.
Changing References
To edit existing references, follow these steps:
1. Click the reference in the worksheet column.
2. Choose Change Reference from the Entry submenu of the Work-
sheet menu or from the worksheet function menu.

7
3. In the Change Reference dialog box, make the edits you wish and
click OK.
Accessing Referenced Items
To go to a referenced item, follow these steps:

1. Click the reference in the worksheet column.
2. Choose Referenced Items from the Entry submenu of the Work-
sheet menu or from the worksheet function menu, or press CTRL+R.
3. Select the referenced item and click Go To. You can also double-
click the referenced item.
Typing References Manually

You can also type references manually. Follow these steps:
1. Select the entry in which you wish to type a reference.
2. Type the reference, such as See System 12.

When you finish typing the reference in the correct syntax,
PHAWorks underlines the reference. The rules regarding proper
syntax are explained in the two sections that follow (Using Key 7
Expressions and Using Separators). You can include additional text
in the reference (such as Node 1, Flow).
Using Key Expressions
The key expressions for references are As for, Refer to, See and Same as.
Some examples are:
As For consequences 5.1.1
See question 1
Refer To safeguard 2.1.2
Same As hazard 3.1
References also include the name and number of the item being refer-
enced. For example, when referencing systems, PHAWorks looks for
the words system or systems, followed by at least one space and a num-
ber. You can type these words in any combination of upper or lower
case letters. In other words, the scheme is not case sensitive.
Using Separators
You can separate more than one item with the following words or
characters:
thru Systems 4 thru 8
through Systems 4 through 8
to Systems 4 to 6
and Systems 4 and 5
, Systems 4, 5, 6
(space) Systems 4 5 6
You can also insert a hash-mark character (#) in front of any reference
number. For instance, references such as Refer to system 4 and Refer to
system #4 are identical.

Creating Revisions of Worksheets
7
PHAWorks includes a Revision feature in the Worksheet menu. When
you start a new revision, PHAWorks saves a snapshot of the work-
sheet, which it numbers and dates. This snapshot can be viewed, but
unlike a copy of a worksheet, this revision cant be edited. In other
words, this feature allows you to save the worksheet at important points
in the study so that you can go back to look at the worksheet at that
point. This feature also allows you to compare a previous version of a
worksheet to the current worksheet revision or to other revisions.
There is always a current revision, and you can have unlimited num-
bers of old revisions. You also have the option to delete all old revi-
sions of a worksheet.
To create a revision of your worksheet, follow these steps:
1. Choose Start New Revision from the Revision submenu in the
Worksheet menu and click Yes in the confirmation dialog that
appears.
or
Choose Start New Revision from the banner function menu and
click Yes in the confirmation dialog that appears.
or
Choose Revision List from the banner function menu and in the
Worksheet Revisions dialog box, choose New.
If you used the Start New Revision command, a Start New Revi-
sion dialog box appears, asking whether you wish to start a new
revision of the current worksheet:
2. If you want to start a new revision and save the current revision,
choose Yes. If you want to start a new revision but not save the
current version, choose Replace. Or, if you dont want to start a
new revision, choose No to cancel the command.

NOTE:
It is possible to make and review revisions of worksheets only in the
same node/parameter or system/subsystem.
7
If you used the Revision List command, the Worksheet Revisions
dialog box appears:
3. Choose New.
A Start New Revision dialog box appears.
4. When you choose Yes or Replace, a New Revision Information
dialog box appears:
5. Number the new revision. You can keep the number that auto-
matically appears in the Number field, or type a new number into
the field.
NOTE:
The programs automatic numbering begins with 0 as the original
revision and 1 as the first new revision.
6. Date the revision by keeping the date that automatically appears

in the Date field, or enter a new date into the field.
7. You may also type anything you may want to note about this
revision into the Notes field.
8. When youre finished, choose OK.

Viewing Revisions
7
If you want to view an old revision (or revisions), follow these steps:
1. Select the Revision submenu in the Worksheet menu and choose
List.
2. When the Worksheet Revisions dialog box appears, select the
revision you want to review, and choose View or press ENTER.
When you select a revision(s), you have a choice of viewing it in
the same window or in a new window. You can access these
choices by right-clicking on a revision in the list and choosing
View in Current Window or View in New Window.
When you are viewing an old revision an additional banner line read-
ing Old Revision appears above the study banner.
You also have a choice of scrolling through old revisions (backward

and forward) and the current revision with icons or menu choices.
You can add Previous Revision, Next Revision and Current Revision
icons to your Worksheet toolbar (see the Customizing the Toolbar sec-
tion in Chapter 6, Modifying Worksheet Presentation). Or, you can use
the Worksheet Revisions dialog box to choose the current revision or a
previous revision to view.

You can quickly identify which revision you are looking at by observ-
ing the additional banner line. It indicates which revision is being
viewed. 7
The revision shows a snapshot of the worksheet, but the entries are
read-only, they cannot be edited. You can, however, temporarily refor-
mat a revision by changing column widths, adding columns, or turn-
ing columns on or off, but when you close a revision, any reformatting
changes you made will not be saved.
You can easily print out worksheet revisions by choosing Print from
the File menu or by pressing F2.
NOTE:
Reports do not print revisions.
Comparing Revisions
If you want to compare revisions, follow these steps:
List.
revisions you want to compare to the current worksheet or to each
other, and choose Compare or press ENTER.

You can also compare revisions by using this method:
1. Selecting the Revision submenu in the Worksheet menu and 7
choose Compare Revisions....
The Compare Worksheet Revisions dialog box appears:

revisions you want to compare to the current worksheet or to each
other, and choose Compare or press ENTER.
As when viewing revisions, you can quickly identify which revisions
you are comparing by observing the additional banner line. It indi-
cates which revisions are being compared.
Deleting Old Revisions
If you want to delete an old revision or revisions, follow these steps:

List.
2. Select the revision you want to delete in the Worksheet Revisions
dialog box, and choose Delete, press ALT+D or press F3. If you
want to delete more than one revision, or all revisions, select the
revisions you want to delete, then choose Delete, press ALT+D or
press F3.
A message asks you to confirm that you want to delete the revi-
sion.
3. Choose Yes.
Revisions for All Worksheets
The New Revision (All Worksheets) command can create new revi-
sions for all worksheets at once.
To create revisions for all worksheets, follow these steps:
1. Choose New Revision (All Worksheets) from the Project menu.

2. A Start New Revision dialog box appears, asking whether you
wish to start new revisions of all worksheets in the current project.
If you want to start new revisions and save the current revision, 7
choose Yes. If you want to start new revisions but not save the
current versions, choose Replace. Or, if you dont want to start
new revisions, choose No to cancel the command.
3. When you choose Yes or Replace, a Revision Information (All
Worksheets) dialog box appears.
4. Number the new revisions. You can keep the number that auto-
matically appears in the Number field, or type a new number into
the field.
NOTE:
The programs automatic numbering begins with 0 as the original
revision and 1 as the first new revision.
5. Date the revision by keeping the date that automatically appears

in the Date field, or enter a new date into the field.
6. You may also type anything you may want to note about the revi-
sions into the Notes field.
7. When you are finished, choose OK.
Editing the Revision Number

In most of the banner fields, you choose items from a list that are then
displayed in the banner fields. You can choose different items from a
list but you dont edit these items directly.
Theres one exception: The information that appears in the Revision
field does not come from a predefined list. Each time you edit the Revi-
sion field, you are giving the worksheet a new number and/or date to
identify the revision.
To do this, follow these steps:
1. Choose the Revision Details command from the banner function
menu, or from the Revision submenu in the Worksheet menu.
NOTE:
You can change the revision number and date for all worksheets by
choosing New Revision (All Worksheets) from the Project menu.
You can create a true revision, or snapshot, of a worksheet, in
addition to simply changing the revision information.

The Revision Information (Current Revision) dialog box appears.
2. To change the revision number, simply enter a new number into 7
the Number box. You can also enter notes into the Notes box.
3. When youre finished, click OK.

Tracking Worksheet Changes
7
PHAWorks 5 includes a feature that lets you track changes in your
worksheet. The Track Worksheet Changes, Show Worksheet Changes
and Restart Change Tracking commands have been added to the
Project menu.
Track Worksheet Changes
Track Worksheet Changes will track all of your changes (based on

entries you alter, add or delete) in the worksheet. To begin tracking the
changes you make to the current worksheet, go under the Project menu
and select Track Worksheet Changes. The program will track changes
you make to the worksheet from that point, until you deselect that
command.
Show Worksheet Changes
When you are tracking changes, you have the option to Show Work-
sheet Changes, which will indicate additions to the worksheet with a
plus sign (+) and deletions with a minus sign (-). To see what changes
youve made to the worksheet, go under the Project menu and select
Show Worksheet Changes.
For instance, if you add an entry after selecting Track Worksheet
Changes, then select Show Worksheet Changes, the new entry will bear
a plus sign in front of both the entry number and text, indicating that
both the number and text are new. Similarly, if you delete an item after
selecting Track Worksheet Changes, then select Show Worksheet
Changes, the deleted entry will reappear and will bear a minus sign in
front of both the entry number and text.

7
Restart Worksheet Changes
If youve been tracking changes in the worksheet, but you want to start
over, i.e., to track changes made from this point but not those made
before, you can choose Restart Change Tracking.
When you choose Restart Change Tracking, a confirmation dialog box
appears, warning you that all existing worksheet change information
will be removed and that only changes made from this point on will be
tracked. If you want to do this, click Yes. Otherwise, click No to cancel
the command.

Creating Hyperlinks to Programs and
Documents 7
The Hyperlinks feature lets you create and access a list of programs
and documents that are relevant to your project (or contain informa-
tion pertinent to your study). You can then open these programs and
documents without leaving PHAWorks.
The Hyperlinks command in the Project menu lets you create a list of
programs and documents that are relevant to your project (or contain
information pertinent to your study). You can insert a link to a pro-
gram or document link into a worksheet entry by using the Hyper-
links submenu of the Worksheet menu. Both of these activities are
described in the sections that follow.
Creating Hyperlinks
To create a list of links to programs or documents, follow these steps:

1. Choose the Hyperlinks command from the Project menu.
The Hyperlinks dialog box appears:
2. Click Add.

7
3. Type the program or document information in each field as de-

fined below:
Field Definition
Display Text The text that appears in a worksheet en-
try when a link is inserted into an entry
Description The title or brief description of the pro-
gram or document
File name The file name of the program or document
Optional parameters Any additional parameters necessary to
run the program. You should enter pa-
rameters only when you specify a pro-
gram in the file name field
Working directory The directory from which you want to the
program. Normally this can be blank, but
for programs that expect to find their data
files in the current directory, you can
specify that directory here
You can click the browse button to select the correct file name and
working directory of the program or document.
4. Click OK.
Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 for each link you wish to create.
5. When you have finished adding links to programs or documents,
click OK.

Running Hyperlinks from a List
To run a link to a program or document, follow these steps:
7
2. Select the program or document you want to open.
3. Click Run.
Editing Hyperlinks in a List

After a link to a program or document has been created, you may need
to update the file name, location or optional parameters. To edit this
information, follow these steps:
2. Select the link you want to modify.
3. Click Details.
The Hyperlink Details dialog box appears:
4. Change the necessary items and click OK.
Deleting Hyperlinks from a List
To delete a link to a program or document from the list, follow these

steps:
2. Select the link you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
A message asks you to confirm that this is what you want to do.
4. Click Yes.

Inserting Hyperlinks into a Worksheet
7
To insert a link to a program or document into a worksheet entry,
follow these steps:
1. Place the text cursor where you want the link to appear. If the entry
already contains the text that you wish to use for your link display
text, select the text.
2. Open the Hyperlinks submenu off the Worksheet menu and
choose Insert.... (You can also access the Insert Hyperlink com-
mand from the entry function menu if you click where you wish to
insert the link.)
If you have placed the text cursor where you want the link to ap-
pear or selected text for the link display text that is the same as a
link already contained in the list, the Choose a Hyperlink dialog
box appears:
3. Select a link and click OK.

The link appears in the worksheet entry with underlined text.
If you have selected text for the link display text that is different
from links already contained in the list, the Add a Hyperlink dia-
log box appears:

4. If you selected text in a worksheet entry, that text appears in the
Display text field. Complete the information for the other fields.
7
5. Click OK.
The link appears as underlined text in the worksheet entry.
The following sections describe how to add a link, execute links, edit
links and delete links.
Running Hyperlinks from a Worksheet
Once a link is inserted into a worksheet entry, there are two ways to
execute the link to the program or document. You can:
Place the cursor in the link and choose Execute from the Hyper-
links submenu or Execute Hyperlink from the entry function menu.
or
Double-click the link.
Editing Hyperlinks in a Worksheet
After a link to a program or document has been inserted into a work-

sheet entry, you may need to update the file name, location or optional
parameters. To edit this information, follow these steps:
1. Select the link.
2. Choose Details from the Hyperlinks submenu or Hyperlink De-
tails from the hyperlink function menu (i.e., right-click directly on
the link).
The Hyperlink Details dialog box appears:
3. Change the necessary items and click OK.

Deleting Hyperlinks from a Worksheet
7
To delete a link from a worksheet entry, follow these steps:
1. Select the link.
2. Choose Delete from the Hyperlinks submenu or Delete Hyper-
link from the hyperlink function menu if you clicked on the link
text.

Chapter 8 Changing
8
Project Information
The instructions included in Chapter 7, Working with Data, pertain to

data that is specific to a worksheet. In this chapter, topics relate to
information that is stored or specified at the project level. This chapter
includes information about:
establishing passwords for projects.
entering and editing project notes.
editing project identification.
modifying session information.
modifying a project team.
creating a default risk ranking
exporting project data.
specifying automatic numbering.
copying information from other projects.
Changing Project Information 8-255

Passwords
8
If you choose to use passwords, you can specify one of three security
schemes for a project:
You can specify a single password that is entered when opening
the project. This password provides full access (both viewing and
editing).
You can specify a password that is required only when you try to
edit the project. This scheme allows you to view project data with-
out having to type a password.
Finally, you can create a password for viewing a project and a
separate password for editing the project. This scheme allows you
to give editing privileges to some team members but not others.
Passwords are unique to the project and do not carry over to new projects.
Enabling Password Protection
The default for a new project is for no passwords to be used. To enable

password protection, follow these steps:
1. Choose Passwords from the Project menu.
The Password Setup dialog box appears:
2. Click the Change check box.

3. Click the radio button of the password configuration you wish to
use and click OK.
The Enter New Password dialog box appears:

8
The fields in this dialog box vary depending on the password

configuration you have chosen.
4. Type the desired password(s) (up to 20 characters).
5. Type the password(s) again in the Reenter new password field to
make sure you did not type the password incorrectly.
6. Click OK to leave the Enter New Password dialog box and enable
the changes to the password scheme.
Changing the Passwords

You can change either the type of password configuration or the pass-
words you have specified (or both). To change passwords, follow these
steps:
2. In the Password Setup dialog box, click the Change check box.
3. Type the current edit password in the following dialog box:
4. Click OK.
5. In the Password Setup dialog box, click the radio button of the
password configuration you wish to change to (or, if youre going
to change the password of the current scheme, make sure it is
selected) and click OK.
The Enter New Password dialog box appears.

7. Type the password(s) again in the Reenter new password field(s)
to make sure you typed the password correctly.
8
Disabling Passwords
If passwords have been set for the project and you wish to disable
2. In the Password Setup dialog box, click the Change check box.
You are prompted to enter the current edit password.
3. Click the No passwords radio button and click OK.
Password protection is now disabled for the project.

Entering Project Notes
8
When you choose Project Notes Window from the Project menu or
click the Notes icon ( ) in the toolbar, a Notes window appears:
You can use this window to enter any information about the project
that is useful for you. You can keep this window open at the same time
you have project worksheet windows open.
NOTE:
The Find/Replace feature is now available in Project Notes
To print and/or preview these notes, follow these steps:

1. Press F2.
or
Choose Print from the File menu while the Project Notes win-
dow is open.
or
Choose the Print button from the Project Identification window or
click the Print icon ( ).
2. Select the Print or Preview button from the Print Project Notes
dialog box.

Editing Project Identification
8
To change the project identification information, follow these steps:
1. Choose Project Identification from the Project menu or from the
2. Type information into the text fields in the Process, Description/

Chemicals and Purpose/Scope/Objectives pages.
History boxes retain a list of previously typed company names,
locations and facilities. You can select items from the history boxes
instead of retyping the same information.
3. To close the dialog box, click OK.
NOTE:
To print the information in this dialog box, click the Print icon,
and choose the Print icon or the Preview icon from the Print
Project Identification dialog box. To check your spelling in these
fields, click the Spell check icon. This dialog box also lets you
choose to include the Project Notes with the printed information.
In addition, you can copy project identification information to the
clipboard by clicking the Copy button, or make the dialog box text
size larger or smaller by clicking the Increase/Decrease Font
Size buttons.
The Project Identification dialog box automatically displays the ap-

propriate project method and gives you the opportunity to designate
the project type (Initial, Revalidation or Update).

This table defines each text field in the Project Identification dialog
box:
Text Box Description
8
Company name The name of the company conducting the
study.
Location Usually, the city and state of the facility (or
other information that identifies the location
of the study).
Facility The name of the building, plant, structure or
other physical entity being studied.
Process A brief description of the part of the facility
being studied.
File description A descriptive name for the study. The Project
name is unique to PHAWorks, and is pro-
vided for your convenience.
Date This can be the start date of the study, the
month and year of the study, or the expected
duration of the study.
Process description Information that describes the process being
studied.
Chemicals The chemicals present in the process that help
create the hazards being studied.
Purpose The reason the study is being performed. A
study may be required by regulatory require-
ments, insurance carriers or company policy.
The purpose must be clearly defined to en-
sure that appropriate study procedures are
followed.
Scope Refers to the subject areas to be addressed,
the criteria against which the study is to be
conducted, the depth of treatment and the pro-
cesses or units to be included. There should
also be a description of the relevant external
events.
Objectives What is to be accomplished by the study. The
objectives should be defined to ensure proper
focus of the study.

Modifying Session Information
8
This section shows you how to access the Sessions dialog box and
modify the session information such as the session date and com-
ments about a session.
Accessing the List of Sessions
To access the Sessions dialog box, follow these steps:

1. Choose Sessions from the Worksheet menu, select the Session
icon ( ) from the toolbar or choose Sessions from the Project
Task Center.
If you access Sessions from the Project Task Center, this dialog
box looks slightly different. Subsequent sections provide instruc-
tions for adding, deleting and editing sessions, as well as setting a
current session.
2. To exit the Sessions dialog box, click Close.
Choosing a Session for the Worksheet
To choose a new session for the current worksheet, follow these steps:
1. Access the Sessions dialog box. (Double-click the Sessions field
in the worksheet banner or choose the Sessions command from
the banner function menu or the Worksheet menu.)

2. Select a session and click OK.
8
Adding a New Session
To add a new session to the project, follow these steps:

1. Access the Sessions dialog box.
2. Click Add.
The Sessions dialog box numbers and sorts sessions chronologi-

cally, so be sure to type the time in the correct hr:mn format for both
time and duration.
NOTE:
The hr:mn format is important in the Time and Duration fields.
In the Time field, for instance, if you type in 2, an invalid
session time message appears. Also, if you dont type in PM,
the program will list the time as AM. Duration displays the
session lengths that are not even numbers exactly as they are
typed. For instance, if you type in 2, the program correctly
understands it as 2:00 hours. But if you type in 135, meaning
one hour and 35 minutes, the program understands it as 135
hours. You must type 1:35.
You can copy the attendance list from a previous session to the
new session by checking the Copy attendance from session x
check box.
3. Type the Date, Time and Duration of the session and click OK.
A new session appears in the list.
Each time you add a new session, PHAWorks automatically gives
it a number and, by default, makes it the current session.
For more information about changing the current session or editing
information about team members, refer to the sections that follow.

Changing the Current Session
The current session is the session that is assigned to all new work-
8
sheets. By default, the current session is the session you added most
recently to the list. If you added the session information for all planned
sessions in advance, you need to set the current session before begin-
ning.
To change the current session, follow these steps:
1. Select the session number you wish to be the current session.
2. Click Set Current.
The word (Current) appears next to the session in the list.
NOTE:
If the current session is not the current date, PHAWorks prompts
you for a session date when entering a worksheet the first time the
project is opened.
Deleting a Session
To delete a session from the list, follow these steps:
1. Select the session to be removed from the list.
2. Click Delete.
A message prompts you to confirm that you want to remove the
session from the list.
3. Click OK.
PHAWorks renumbers all subsequent sessions.
Changing Session Details

After you create a session, you can change the session date, time and
duration by clicking the Details button. Follow these steps:
1. Select the session you need to edit.
2. Click the Details button.
The Session X dialog box appears.
3. Make the necessary changes and click OK.

Recording Team Attendance
You can access the project team from the Sessions dialog box by click-
8
ing the Team tab.
While the list of members is created independent of individual ses-
sions, you can record who of the team is expected or has attended the
project sessions. You also have the option of copying the attendance
from the current session.
Subsequent sections describe how to modify the project team. These

instructions describe only how to record which team members are
present for individual sessions.
Follow these steps:
1. Select a session from the List page and click the Team tab at the
top of the dialog box.
or
Go directly to the Team tab and select a session from the drop-
down list.
2. Check the Show all check box if you wish to see a list of all the
project team members, whether present or not for the current ses-
sion.
3. Select a team member and the check boxes that apply to this mem-
ber: Present, Leader and/or Scribe. You can also select team mem-
bers with the function menu accessed by right-clicking in the team
member field.

Adding Session Notes
PHAWorks provides a dialog box for entering notes regarding the

8
study session, such as keeping track of each sessions goals. To enter
session notes, follow these steps:
1. In the Sessions dialog box, select the session for which you wish
to enter notes and click the Notes tab at the top of the dialog box.
or
Go directly to the Notes tab and select a session from the drop-
down list.
A Notes page appears:
NOTE:
These notes are different from the project notes, and can be used,
for example, to document special needs or goals for a session.
2. Type the notes for the session. When youre finished, you can click
Spell to check for spelling errors in your notes. To print the infor-
mation in this dialog box, click the Print button. Click OK to close
the dialog box and save the changes. If you click Close, no changes
will be saved.

Modifying the Project Team
8
This section provides steps for adding and deleting team members
and editing the team member information. While you can access the
project team from the Team page of the Sessions dialog box, the in-
structions that follow assume that you access the team from the Project
menu.
Adding a Team Member

1. Select Project Team from the Project menu or Project Task Center.
2. Click Add.
The Add Team Member dialog box appears.

3. Enter information for each field. History boxes retain a list of pre-
viously typed titles, phone numbers, locations, technical areas,
qualifications and organizations. You can select items from the 8
history boxes instead of retyping the same information. You can
also select whether you want to add the new members name at the
end of the list or in the current position.
4. If you wish this team member to appear in the master team list,
NOTE:
For more information about the master team list, refer to Chapter
9, Tools and Utilities. To specify if a team member will be
present for a session or if the member is the Leader or Scribe of the
team, you must access the Team list from the Sessions dialog box.

member, click OK.
The following table describes the member information text fields:
Text field Description
Name The full name of the team member
Title The members title
Phone The members telephone number
Location The city and state where the team member is
based
Department The department this team member works in
or represents
Qualifications The team members degrees or certifications
Technical area The team members specialty, if any

Comments Additional information about a team
members skills, schedule, etc.
8
Deleting a Team Member Entry
To delete a team member from a project, follow these steps:

1. Select Project Team from the Project menu.
2. Select the team member entry you wish to delete.
CAUTION:
Deleting a team member means you are removing that team
member from the entire project. If a team member wont be
available for a particular session, you can record this information
through the Team page of the Sessions dialog box.
3. Click Delete.
A message prompts you to confirm that you want to remove the
member from the project.
4. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
The revised list of team members appears.
Editing Team Member Information

To edit information associated with a team member, follow these steps:
1. Select Project Team from the Project menu.
2. Select the team member entry to be edited and click Details.
A team member dialog box appears.
3. Type the new information in the fields that require editing.
If you wish this team member to appear in the master team list,
NOTE:
For more information about the master team list, refer to Chapter
9, Tools and Utilities. To specify if a team member will be present
for a session or if the member is the Leader or Scribe of the team,
you must access the Team list from the Sessions dialog box.
4. When you finish editing the team member information, click OK.

Other Project Team List Functions
The Team dialog box also lets you duplicate or delete team members,
8
or print the team list. This table defines the items in the dialog box:
Button Description of Function
Duplicate Opens the Duplicate Team Member dialog
box, displaying the same information as the
selected team member. This is useful when
adding a new member from the same loca-
tion or technical area as an existing member.
Delete Deletes currently selected team member.
Details Opens the Team Member Details dialog box,
which lets you edit information about the se-
lected team member.
Print Prints the team list.
Cut ( ) Cuts the selected member to the clipboard.
Copy ( ) Copies the selected member to the clipboard.
Paste ( ) Pastes the selected member to the clipboard.
Master Opens the Master Team List dialog box.

Setting the Risk Ranking
8
PHAWorks includes the ability to perform a risk ranking of each iden-
tified scenario, where risk is defined in terms of the combined likeli-
hood and severity of that scenario. These are qualitative rankings cre-
ated using a simple scale of up to nine levels for severity and for likeli-
hood.
You can save values in a file that can be used in other projects. A
projects risk ranking can then be modified without entering the infor-
mation again.
Enter risk ranking values in the Risk Ranking dialog box (accessed by
choosing Project Risk Ranking from the Project menu box) and corre-
sponding risk grid.
This section provides instructions for:
selecting a new risk ranking scheme by defining the levels of se-
verity and likelihood to be used.
defining the meaning of each level of severity and likelihood.
defining the risk values.
using Risk Ranking in a project.
Accessing Risk Ranking
To access and set up a risk ranking scheme, follow these steps:

1. Choose Project Risk Ranking from the Project menu.

8
2. When the risk ranking is enabled, the Use risk ranking check box
is checked.
3. If you want lower values to identify more serious risk or severity,
check either or both of these options:
Top severity values are more serious

NOTE:
These settings are used for the Risk Statistical report.
4. To add severity or likelihood levels, select the list you wish to edit,
click the Add button and type a name for the new level. For more
information, refer to the section entitled Editing the Severity and
Likelihood Levels.
5. The Risk Ranking dialog box allows you to enter your own values
for the Severity and Likelihood (S/L) columns. You may use up to
four characters, in a combination of letters and numerals, to define
those values. When you enter an S/L value, the dialog box prompts
you to indicate the following items:
S/L Display Value (up to four characters, numerals and/or
letters)
A description
6. You can enter or change information in the Notes field to provide
a description of the risk ranking file being used.
7. If you want to edit the risk grid, click the Risk Grid button.
8. To save the changes and leave the Risk Ranking page, click OK.

NOTE:
You can view or change the risk ranking file that is used for new
projects in the Locations page of the Options dialog box, which
8
is accessed through the Utilities menu.
Loading a Risk Ranking File

PHAWorks allows you to load an existing Risk Ranking file into your
project. When you do this, the new risk ranking is saved with your
project, eliminating the need to create a new risk ranking scheme each
time. To load an existing risk ranking file, follow these steps:
1. Click Load in the Risk Ranking dialog box.
The Load Risk Ranking dialog box appears:
2. Select the file you wish to use.

You can enter or change information in the Notes field to provide
a description of the risk ranking file you loaded.
3. Click Open.
Saving a Risk Ranking Scheme as a File
PHAWorks allows you to save multiple risk ranking schemes for use
in future projects. To save a risk ranking scheme, follow these steps:
1. Click Save in the Risk Ranking dialog box.
The Save Risk Ranking dialog box appears:

8
2. Type a new file name for the file.

You can enter or change information in the Notes field to provide
a description of the risk ranking file you saved.
3. Click Save.
Editing the Severity and Likelihood Levels
By default, there are five levels of severity and likelihood, though you
can define up to nine severity and likelihood levels. You can add more
levels, or edit the names of the existing levels. This section gives brief
instructions for each of these tasks.
Adding a Severity or Likelihood Level
To add a severity or likelihood level to an existing list, follow these

steps:
1. Select the list you wish to modify.
A dialog box to add a definition appears.
3. Mark the End radio button to add the new level at the end of the
existing list or the Current position button to add it at the current
position.
You can change the font size of the text in the dialog box by using
the Increase/Decrease Font Size buttons ( ).
4. Type a display value and a description for the new level and press
ENTER or click OK.

Editing a Severity or Likelihood Level
To edit the definition of an existing severity or likelihood level, follow 8

these steps:
1. Select the level you wish to edit.
2. Click the Edit button.
A dialog box to edit the definition appears.
You can change the font size of the text in the dialog box by using
the Increase/Decrease Font Size buttons.
3. Type the display value and description of the level and press EN-
TER or click OK.
The newly edited level appears in the list.
Deleting a Severity or Likelihood Definition
To delete a severity or likelihood definition, follow these steps:

1. Select the definition you wish to delete.
2. Click the Delete button.
A message asks you to confirm that you want to delete the current
definition.
3. Click Yes to confirm your intention.
PHAWorks deletes the definition.
Changing the Risk Grid
When you are defining a risk ranking scheme, there is a good chance
that you will have to alter some of the values in the risk grid. For
example, if you change the number of severity and likelihood levels,
you will have to edit the grid accordingly.
To change any value in the risk grid, follow these steps:
1. Click the Risk Grid button in the Risk Ranking dialog box to see
the default grid:

8
2. Move the text cursor to the item that is to be changed.

3. Type the desired value (0000 through 9999 or AAAA to ZZZZ).
4. Repeat these steps until all of the ranking values correspond with
your risk ranking scheme.
5. Click Swap or press ALT+S if you want to swap axes on the grid.
6. Click OK to return to the Risk Ranking dialog box.

Exporting Project Data
8
You can export the current projects data to the outline (hierarchical),
record (list or comma delimited) or MANAGE-PC V2 format. The fol-
lowing table provides a brief definition of the outline and record for-
mats:
Format Definition
Outline This formats hierarchical data reflects the col-
umn relationships in a project. Every succes-
sive level in the hierarchy is indented with a
single tab.
Record list In this format, each field is on a separate line
and records are separated by a line contain-
ing text such as <<Record 4 >>.
Comma delimited Each record occupies a single line and each
field is surrounded by double quotes and
separated with a comma. This is used most
often because it is easily imported into com-
mercial database, spreadsheet and word pro-
cessing programs.
Both the record list and comma delimited formats are based on the
information in the RECOMMENDATIONS column.
To export project data, follow these steps:
1. Choose Export... from the File menu or the Project Task Center.
The Choose Export File Format dialog box appears:
2. Select a file format and click OK.

NOTE:
If you select either of the Record formats or the MANAGE-PC V2
format, you can also specify filters for the exported data. The
Record formats also allow you to specify export options regarding
the data to be exported. For more information, refer to the sections

entitled Specifying Export Options and Selecting Export
Filters.
8
The Export Current Project dialog box appears:
3. Type a file name for the exported data, select a destination direc-
tory and click Export.
Specifying Export Options

If you selected either of the record formats, you can also select the
worksheet information that you want exported. Follow these steps:
1. Select a record format from the Choose Export File Format dialog
box.
2. Click Options.
The Export Fields dialog box appears:
3. To include a field, select it and click Include. To exclude a field

from the exported data, select it and click Exclude. (You can also
check or uncheck the fields, or click Include All or Exclude All.)
When you finished selecting the fields, click OK to return to the
Choose Export File Format.

4. To continue exporting the selected data, click OK.
NOTE:
8
Moving the order of the fields changes the order in which the data
is exported
Selecting Export Filters

Filters allow you to limit the information to be exported by selecting
worksheet data with certain values or ranges of values. For example,
you can specify that only nodes within a ange be included in the ex-
ported file. If you specify two filters (for example, Nodes 1 to 10 and
Risk Ranking 5), items must match both filters to be included.
To select filters for your exported file, follow these steps:
1. In the Choose Export File Format dialog box, select one of the
record export formats or the MANAGE-PC V2 export format.
CAUTION:
MANAGE-PC V2 is a DOS-based recommendation tracking
program that cannot accommodate the increased functionality of
the risk ranking features in PHAWorks 5. If you use the ability to
have three or more characters for the S/L values, those values will
be truncated to two characters when imported into MANAGE-PC
V2.
2. Choose Filters.
The Export Filters dialog box appears:
3. Click Add to add filters to the list box.

The Choose Filter Field dialog box appears:

8
4. Select a field and click OK.

Depending on whether the field you selected is a numeric, text or
date field, another dialog box prompts you to specify the filter
values and options.
5. Select the Operator and type the values you wish to use.
NOTE:
For more information about numeric, text and date fields, refer to
the section on Report Filters in Chapter 10, Generating Re-
ports.
6. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the Export Filters

dialog box.
Repeat steps 3 through 6 to continue adding filters, if needed.
7. Make sure that Use Filters has been selected. (If you wish to dis-
able the filters, make sure the Use Filters check box is not selected.
This feature lets you disable filters without deleting them.)
8. Click OK to return to the Choose Export File Format dialog box.
If you have selected the Use Filters check box, the Filters button
now says Filters (On).
9. To continue exporting the selected data, click OK.

Setting Automatic Numbering
8
Numbering worksheet entries is a common shortcut used while enter-
ing worksheet information. References to numbered entries may be-
come quickly outdated and manually updating these references may
prove to be a cumbersome task.
NOTE:
In order to implement the renumbering feature for node/system/
subsystem/category references and worksheet entries, PHAWorks
must be able to recognize all occurrences of references in your
project. You can type references manually, or you can use the
Create Reference feature. For information about this feature and
the reference rules, refer to Chapter 7, Working with Data.
The automatic numbering feature of PHAWorks simplifies the process

of numbering entries and keeping all references accurate. The Auto-
matic Numbering dialog box is accessed from the Project menu or the
Project Task Center:
You can update the automatic numbering (none, simple, cascade,

manual) for individual columns by selecting Change Entry Number-
ing from the column function menu (accessed by placing the cursor in
a column heading and right-clicking). You can also change the num-
bering for all columns in one dialog box by selecting Automatic Num-
bering... from the Project menu.
The following sections describe each automatic numbering option.

Enabling References
The first two check boxes of the Automatic Numbering dialog box
8
prompts you to enable one or two of several possible referencing op-
tions. For instance, you may see:
Enable node/system referencing
Enable subsystem/category referencing
The default for this option is that PHAWorks will not enable referenc-
ing. But if this check box is selected, PHAWorks renumbers any refer-
ences in the worksheet affected by inserting, deleting or moving sys-
tems, nodes or subsystems.
Numbering Worksheet Entries
The Automatic Numbering dialog box includes this option:

Automatic entry numbering
The default for the Automatic entry numbering option is that
PHAWorks will not automatically number worksheet entries. Num-
bering entries usually makes it easier to track information in the work-
sheet. This can be done manually by the scribe, but if you enable the
automatic entry numbering feature, PHAWorks does the numbering
for you. Without automatic numbering, PHAWorks cannot provide
worksheet references.
You can select either simple or cascade numbering for each column in
the list box (or manual numbering for the Recommendations column).
Simple numbering means that entries are numbered with only a single
level of numbering. An example simple numbering sequence is 1, 2, 3,
4.
Cascade numbering follows a format similar to outlining. The num-
bers of entries depend on their parent entries. For example, if an entry
is numbered 1.1, its first child is numbered 1.1.1, its second child is
numbered 1.1.2, and so on.
Manual numbering (only available for the Recommendations column)
means that the number must be entered by the user and is not assigned
by the program. For Recommendations, the number is entered in the
Recommendations Reference Number (REF#) column. Please note that
a manual number is not the same as just typing a number into an entry.
With manual numbers, you can still reference Recommendation en-
tries. When you type a number directly into the Recommendation en-
try, it is not recognized as a number, and cannot be used in a reference.

Based on your selection of the numbering type, other options are avail-
able:
The Prefix field allows you to enter letters or numbers that will be
8
added to the beginning of a number. For example, if you type a prefix of
"R-", the numbers might look like R-1, R-2, R-3, etc. This option is al-
ways available for simple and cascade numbers.
The First Number field (which is only available if you are not restart-
ing your numbering), allows you to specify the first number in the
assigned sequence. You will probably want use the default value of 1,
but in some cases you might wish to have your numbering start with a
different value, for example if you wish to number your recommenda-
tions across multiple projects. If you specify a First Number value of
101, the first three items would be numbered 101, 102, and 103.
The Restart field contains a dropdown list with all of the parents of
this column that have numbering. It also contains other restart divi-
sions such as Worksheet, Node, Step, or System. This specifies the
break point where numbering will begin again at 1. With simple num-
bering, the default is "Worksheet", which means that the first entry in
this column in each worksheet will be assigned the number 1. If you
are using cascade numbering, the default is the closest parent entry
that uses numbering. For example, if Consequences are related to Causes
and Consequences use cascade numbering, the first Consequence child
of each Cause will have a number of 1. For Cause 2, the Consequences
will be numbered 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, etc. For Cause 4, the Consequences will
be numbered 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, etc.
Automatic Renumbering is turned on by default. This means that the
entries are always numbered sequentially from top to bottom. If there
are four entries, they will always be numbered 1, 2, 3, 4. If you insert an
entry before entry 3, it will be assigned the number 3 and the following
entries will be renumbered to 4, 5. If this option is turned off, numbers
are assigned sequentially, but entries are never renumbered. This means
that once a number is assigned, it will not change (if you are using
cascade numbering and the parent's number changes, the parent com-
ponent of the number might change, but not the root number assigned
to this entry). If the entries are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, and you insert an
entry before entry 3, the new entry will be assigned the number 5 and
the sequence will now be 1, 2, 5, 3, 4. Turning off this option is useful if
you need to reference entries from outside of PHAWorks and the study
is still in process. In most cases, you will probably want to leave this
option checked while you are completing the study.
PHAWorks allows numbering for Recommendations in the REF# col-
umn. If you select automatic numbering in the Recommendations col-
umn, that means you are providing each recommendation with a
unique ID number. You can select to have the numbers shown in either
that column or the REF# column. If you select to have the numbers

appear in the REF# column, they cannot also appear in the Recom-
mendations column.
The default selection for all of the columns listed in this dialog is that
8
they are not numbered. You must select each column to be included in
the numbering scheme.
PHAWorks also allows you to custom number Nodes, Systems, Sub-
systems and Categories. You can do this by clicking the Numbering
button in these dialog boxes. As with the custom numbering for col-
umns, you can have automatic or manual numbering; you can indi-
cate what the first number will be in the numbering scheme; you can
add a prefix to the numbering; and you can indicate whether they
items should keep the same number or be automatically renumbered
when the list changes.
Enabling Entry Referencing
The final check box in this dialog box is:

Enable entry referencing
If you enable this option, references to entries automatically adjust as
you insert or delete entries. This feature is similar to the automatic
primary division and secondary division referencing features described
earlier in this section.

Copying Information from Other
Projects 8
To help maintain consistency between projects and/or to ensure the

accuracy of information on studies of the same facility, you can copy
project information from one project to another. Follow these steps:
1. Choose Copy From Other Project from the Project menu or the
PHAWorks prompts you to select a source project. (You can select
its name and choose Project ID to check the Project Information
dialog box of the source project.)
2. Choose the project from which you want to copy information and
click Open.
After you select a project, the following dialog box appears:

NOTE:
Some items in the Copy from Project dialog box require that
the project configuration items be the same for both source and
8
destination. If you select an item that does not exist in the source
project, a message will alert you.
3. Select the items you want to copy. You can browse a list of source
items for items to be copied. This is helpful in determining what
program information you need to copy into the destination project.
(A table follows these instructions, defining each of the copy op-
tions.)
4. When youre ready to starting copying information, click Copy.
PHAWorks copies the selected information to the destination
project, and informs you when the copy is complete.
5. Click OK.
The following table describes each item in the dialog box.
Copy item Description
Risk Ranking Copies items included in the risk ranking
scheme, replacing items in current scheme
Column configuration Copies the configuration of columns from
the source project, replacing the current col-
umn configuration
Banner names Copies the banner names and replaces the
current banner names
Drawings Copies the list of drawings/documents, ap-
pending them to the current drawing/docu-
ment list
Entry numbering Copies the numbering scheme for entries in
worksheet columns, replacing the current
entry numbering
Global parameters Copies the global parameters for Quick En-
try lists, replacing the current global param-
eters
Team Copies the project team list and appends it
to the current project team list
Sessions Copies the session list and associated in-
formation and appends it to the current ses-
sions list
Hyperlinks Copies the hyperlink information associated
with the project and appends it to the cur-
rent hyperlink information

Copy Nodes/. . . Copies nodes, systems and subsystems
(may vary depending on project type) and
appends them to the current nodes, etc. 8
Copy worksheet entries Copies the worksheet information for the
items selected and copies it to the current
worksheet information
Copy quick entry lists Copies the selected quick entry lists from
the source project and replaces the current
quick entry list
In other words, when you copy nodes/systems, drawings, team lists,
sessions, hyperlinks and worksheet entries, these items are appended
to the lists in the destination project. Column configuration, risk rank-
ing, banner names, entry numbering and quick entry lists replace the
existing information in the destination project.

Using the Quick Copy Feature
8
The Copy From Other Project feature makes it easy to copy large
amounts of information from other projects. However, there are times
when you only need to copy an entry from the same worksheet or
project. The Quick CopyTM feature allows you to do this.
In addition, the Quick Copy feature allows you to copy worksheet
information without leaving the current worksheet entry.
To copy an entry into the current cursor location, follow these steps:
1. Place the text cursor in the column where you want to insert the
new entry.
2. Choose Quick Copy from the Entry submenu in the Worksheet
menu or from the worksheet function menu, click the Quick Copy
icon ( ) or press CTRL+Q.
The following dialog box appears (this dialog may vary based on
where you are in the software):
3. The current project is listed at the top of this dialog box. To choose
another project, click the Browse button, select the new project and
click OK to return to the Quick Copy dialog box.
The Quick Copy dialog box automatically changes position to
show the current entry. If you want this dialog box to remain in the
same location on the screen the next time you open it, make sure
the Lock Pos. check box is selected.
4. In the Primary drop-down list box (Node, Step or System), select
the primary worksheet item with which the entry is associated.

Continue selecting the worksheet items until you locate the entry
you wish to copy into the current location.
If you want to copy related entries as well, make sure the Copy all
8
children of the selected entries check box is selected.
5. Make sure the check box in front of the entry (or entries) you wish
to copy is selected, and click OK.

Chapter 9 Tools and
9
Utilities
PHAWorks includes a number of utilities to provide you with more

information during studies and to make your work easier. For example,
the Analysis Tools feature provides detailed information from stan-
dards and regulations for you to use in your PHA study.
This chapter contains information about:
the Analysis Tools feature, which provides additional study aids.
the Sage technical assistance feature, which provides additional
study aids for HAZOP studies.
the HAZOP Cost Analysis feature, which helps you calculate the
estimated costs of conducting a study.
the Library, which can be used to store any information that is not
specific to any project.
the File Maintenance utility, which helps you copy, move, rename
and delete project files.
the Master Team list utility, which lets you compile a list of team
members that can be copied into project-specific team lists.
the Spelling utility and its options.
Information on the bookmarks utility is located in Chapter 4, PHAWorks

Basics. Youll find information on the Options dialog box throughout
the User Guide. For example, information on setting Locations and
Preferences is located in Chapter 4, PHAWorks Basics. Information on
Display, Views and Toolbar options is in Chapter 6, Modifying Work-
sheet Presentation.
Tools and Utilities 9-290

Using the Analysis Tools
9
PHAWorks provides additional aids to assist you before, during and
after the study. The Analysis Tools feature provides these built-in aids
to facilitate studies and to increase the efficiency of the study team.
You can copy Analysis Tools information, in whole or part, to the
worksheet, the library, a Quick Entry list or other programs.
PHAWorks provides Analysis Tools information in areas including,
but not limited to:
Hazard examples
Causes examples
Consequence examples
Ignition sources
PHA regulatory requirements
Severity and likelihood examples
Utilities
Use the Analysis Tools as a source of information to help you begin the
work and as a catalyst for promoting creative thinking. The topics are
not intended to be comprehensive and may not provide information
applicable to every process or operation in your studies. You are en-
couraged to build upon the information provided by copying the infor-
mation into the Library, or a word processing program, and customiz-
ing it.
Opening an Analysis Tools Topic
To open an Analysis Tools topic, follow these steps:

1. Choose Analysis Tools from the Tools menu or choose the analy-
sis tools icon in the toolbar.
The Analysis Tools dialog box appears:

9
The Analysis Tools dialog box shows a list of available topics.

2. Double-click a topic or select it and click OK.
The topic appears in a document window.
You can use the Navigate menu to move around efficiently in
Analysis Tools. After you open a topic, the Navigate menu con-
tains these commands:
Command Definition
Choose Topic Opens the Analysis Tools dialog box so you
can open another topic in the current win-
dow
New Window Opens another document window for an ad-
ditional Analysis Tools topic
Previous Topic Replaces the topic currently in the Analysis
Tools window with the previous topic listed
in the Analysis Tools dialog box
Next Topic Replaces the topic currently in the Analysis
Tools window with the next topic listed in
the Analysis Tools dialog box
Jump Backward Moves you back one page or topic from the
currently open page or topic
Jump Forward Moves you forward one page or topic from
the currently open page or topic
Bookmarks Accesses the bookmark function , allowing
you to set bookmarks in Analysis Tools and
move to locations you have bookmarked
These commands also have corresponding toolbar icons.

Printing an Analysis Tools Topic
To print and/or preview an Analysis Tools topic, follow these steps:

9
1. Press F2 while the topic is open.
or
Choose Print from the File menu while the topic is open.
or
Select a topic from the Analysis Tools dialog box and choose the
Print button.
2. Select the Print or Preview button from the Print Analysis Tools
Topic dialog box.
Selecting Text in an Analysis Tools Topic
The Analysis Tools topics cant be edited in an Analysis Tools win-

dow. You can, however, copy a topic or portions of a topic to the clip-
board, which can then be pasted into the worksheet, library topic or
elsewhere to be modified.
To select part of an Analysis Tools topic, follow these steps:
1. Open an Analysis Tools topic.
2. If you want to copy a portion of the topic, select the items you want
to be copied. Otherwise, skip to step 3.
REMINDER:
You can select a single entry or multiple entries. To select mul-
tiple, contiguous items, click and drag. To select multiple,
noncontiguous entries, press CTRL and click.
This illustration shows more than one item selected:

9
PHAWorks allows you to select only complete entries (rather than

selecting single words or partial entries). Modifications to entries
or topics can be made after you copy the data into the worksheet or
library. Of the Analysis Tools information that you select, only
those items preceded by a hyphen will be inserted into a worksheet.
3. Use the Copy command in the Edit menu, click the copy icon ( )
or press CTRL+C to copy the selected text to the clipboard.
If no items are selected, PHAWorks asks if you want to copy the entire
topic. Click Yes.
NOTE:
You can leave Analysis Tools topics open, and switch between
worksheet windows and Analysis Tools topic windows by select-
ing the desired location in the Windows menu. For example, after
you have copied Analysis Tools information to the clipboard, you
can open a Library topic and paste the text there.

Using the Sage Feature
9
The Sage feature provides lists of causes that are associated with spe-
cific components and deviations. When youre conducting your study,
you can use the Sage to automate the entry of causes in the worksheet.
NOTE:
Sage is only available for HAZOP studies.
There are various ways in which the Sage can be used. Some team
leaders may wish to enter into PHAWorks all components in each
node together with the node names prior to meeting with the team.
They can then enter causes from the Sage database into the worksheet
to produce a draft that can be reviewed with the team. The team leader
can then edit entries from the Sage based on the teams comments and
add any additional causes identified by the team.
Alternatively, the team leader may wish to delay entering causes using
the Sage until the team meeting has been convened. The Sage can then
be used to display a list of common causes of each deviation selected
by the team and the leader may select those causes considered to be
important by the team and add any additional causes identified by the
team.
Some leaders may not want to enter components for each node prior to
meeting with the team. They may prefer to involve the team with this
process. They would then likely define node components as each node
is considered. The Sage can then be used to display a list of common
causes of each deviation selected by the team and the leader may select
those causes considered to be important by the team.
You can edit the Sage database provided with PHAWorks, adding
components, editing standard deviations or adding causes. You can
use the same database for each project or you may want to create a
Sage database that is project specific.
Choosing Causes from Sage

Before you can use the Sage database to insert causes into the work-
sheet, your study needs to be configured to use node components. In
addition, you need to have specified components for the current node
before continuing with the following steps.
To insert causes from the Sage database into the current worksheet,
follow these steps:

1. Select the place in the Causes column where you want to insert the
new causes.
2. Click the Sage Causes icon (

9
), click Sage Causes from the Tools
menu or press CTRL+K.
The Sage - Causes dialog box for the current deviation appears:
This dialog box displays causes for each component that has been
specified in the node and for which there are causes listed in the
Sage database. To show all components, even if they have no causes
defined in the database, click Show All. To display the full name,
qualifier and ID for the component, make sure Full Name is se-
lected.
NOTE:
The component qualifier and ID can be specified when you add a
component. Component qualifier is any additional modifier for
their own identification purposes. This could be, for example, the
size of line or valve or its manufacturer. The Component ID is the
identification found on the P&ID drawing (such as inlet valve
17).
You can also collapse and expand the causes for all the compo-
nents displayed in this dialog box. To do this, select the compo-
nent and click Expand or Collapse.
3. Select one or more causes from the list and click OK. To select
multiple, contiguous items, click and drag. To select multiple, non-
contiguous entries, press CTRL and click.
You can also insert all of the causes listed in this dialog box into
the Causes column by clicking All Causes.
PHAWorks enters the selected cause(s) after the currently high-
lighted entry.

When youre in this dialog box, you may discover that you need to edit
the Sage database. To do this, click the Database button. Editing the
database is described in more detail in the sections that follow. 9
Accessing the Sage Database
To access the Sage database, you can choose Sage Database from the
Tools menu or click the Sage Database icon ( ) in the toolbar. This
dialog box appears:
If the Sage database was not found in the directory specified in the
Directories page of the Options dialog box, this message appears:
If you want to create a Sage database, click Yes. Otherwise, click No

and choose the Locations page from the Options dialog box to change
the directory. Any new Sage database that you create can be based on
the default database or it can be a new database that you create.
After you access the Sage dialog box, you can add, copy, edit and
delete component types, deviations and causes. These modifications
can be made by selecting the appropriate button from the list or by
selecting the appropriate item from the function menu. The function
menu also lists available ALT+ key combinations.

Special Sage Items
The Sage Database dialog box also includes four special items at the
9
end of the component list for each deviation:
These items Upstream, Downstream, External Events and General

list causes that are not necessarily related to specific components.
For example, a line with reduced flow may be a result of some blockage
or leak upstream (that is, in a node other than the one you are study-
ing).
These items also always appear in the Sage - Causes dialog box, and
you can insert the causes associated with them into your worksheet in
the same way as for causes associated with components.
Modifying the Sage Database

The Sage Database dialog box lists many common component types
used in various processes, common deviations associated with those
components, and common causes associated with each deviation.
PHAWorks allows you to modify these lists.
These sections provide instructions for modifying the list of compo-
nent types and the associated causes, followed by instructions for modi-
fying the list of deviations.
Adding a New Component or Cause
To add a new component or cause to the list, follow these steps:

1. To add a new component, make sure you have selected another
component. To add a new cause, make sure you have selected
another cause. (Any cause or component will do.)

press ALT+A.
The Add dialog box appears.
9
3. Type the new item name and press ENTER or click OK.
NOTE
When youre adding a component, the type refers to any item that
is part of a node (such as a controller, line or valve). Component
qualifier is any additional modifier for their own identification
purposes. This could be, for example, the size of line or valve or its
manufacturer. The Component ID is the identification found on
the P&ID drawing (such as inlet valve 17).
The new item appears in the list. Note that the Sage dialog box
alphabetizes components.
NOTE:
You can also use the Cut, Copy and Paste buttons to move
components, causes, etc. between Sage and other sources via the
clipboard.
Deleting a Component or Cause
To delete a component or cause from the list, follow these steps:

1. Select the item to be deleted.
2. Choose the Delete button, choose Delete from the function menu
or press ALT+D.
A message asks you to confirm that you want to delete it.
3. Click Yes or press ENTER to confirm the deletion.
PHAWorks deletes the item.
Duplicating Existing Components
To add a new component that is a variation of an existing component,

you can use the Duplicate button. Follow these steps:
1. Select the component you want to copy. Choose the Duplicate
button, choose Duplicate from the function menu or press ALT+U.

A new copy of the component appears in the list (followed by a
colon and a number that denotes if this is the first or second copy
of the component, etc.). 9
2. You can now rename this component, as described below.
Editing a Component or Cause
To edit a cause (or rename a component) in the list, follow these step:
1. Select the item you want to edit.
2. Click Edit or Rename.
The Edit dialog box appears. (For a component type, the Rename
dialog box appears.)
3. Type the new name and press ENTER or click OK.
Finding Text in Sage
To search for text, follow these steps:

1. Position the text cursor where you want to begin the search.
2. Click on the Find button or press ALT+F.
The Find dialog box appears.
3. Type the text you want to find in the Find what: text box. If you
want to search for more than one word or phrase, separate each
entry with a comma (for example: Search text 1, search text 2, search
text 3). Use quotation marks to find phrases with commas or with
leading or trailing spaces (for example Columbus, OH or ma-
terial).
Under Search, you have the option of limiting your search by se-
lecting Causes or expanding your search to the whole worksheet
by selecting Everything. In addition, under Find from, you can
choose to begin your search at the Beginning of the worksheet or
at your Current position in the worksheet.
4. Click Find Next to initiate the search.

Additional occurrences of the text can be found by clicking the Find
Next button.
9
Printing the Sage Database
To print a copy of the Sage database, follow these steps:

1. Choose Print or press CTRL+P.
The Print dialog box appears.
2. Mark the appropriate radio button to sort Sage by either compo-
nents or deviations.
3. Click Preview to view an on screen version of the database.
4. Click Print to print the database.
Changing the Deviation List
PHAWorks also allows you to edit the list of deviations in the Sage
database. You can access the Sage - Deviations dialog box when you
add or edit the Deviations in the Sage Database dialog box. You can
also access the Sage - Deviations dialog box from the Tools menu.
This list of deviations is accessed by PHAWorks each time you enter a

new worksheet, so even if you dont make use of the Sage feature, you
may find it quite helpful to be able to modify the definitions of devia-
tions. The following sections provide instructions for adding, deleting
and editing deviations.

NOTE:
These instructions assume that the Sage - Deviations dialog box
is already open.
9
Adding a Deviation
To add a new item to a list, follow these steps:

press ALT+A.
The Add Deviation dialog box appears:
2. Type the Deviation, Guideword and Parameter.

3. Mark the appropriate radio button to add the new deviation at the
current location or at the end of the list and press ENTER or click
OK.
Deleting a Deviation
To delete a deviation from the list, follow these steps:

1. Select the deviation to be deleted.
2. Choose the Delete button, choose Delete from the function menu
or press ALT+D.
A message asks you to confirm that you want to delete the devia-
tion.

3. Click Yes or press ENTER to confirm the deletion.
PHAWorks deletes the deviation. 9
NOTE:
When you delete a deviation, PHAWorks also deletes all causes
associated with it from the Sage database.
Editing a Deviation
To change the deviation, follow these step:

1. Select the deviation you want to edit.
2. Click Edit.
The Edit Deviation dialog box appears.
3. Type the new Deviation, Guideword and Parameter and press
ENTER or click OK.
The revised deviation appears in the list.
Setting Sage Passwords

If you choose to use passwords for the Sage database (including the
Sage Deviations), you can specify one of three security schemes:
You can specify a single password that is entered when opening
the Sage database. This password provides full access (both view-
ing and editing).
You can specify a single password that is required only when you
try to edit the Sage database. This scheme allows you to use and
view the database without having to type a password.
Finally, you can create a password for viewing a database and a
separate password for editing the database. This scheme allows
you to give editing privileges to some team members but not oth-
ers.
Sage passwords are unique to each database and, for greater security,
should not be the same as the project password or library password.

The default for a new Sage database is for no passwords to be used. To

9
enable password protection, follow these steps:
1. Choose Passwords from the Sage Database dialog box.

use and click OK.

5. Type the password(s) again in the Verify text box to make sure
you typed the password correctly.

You can change either the type of password configuration or the pass- 9
steps:
2. In the Passwords dialog box, click the Change check box.

change to (or, if youre going to change the password of the current
scheme, make sure it is selected) and click OK.
Disabling Passwords
If passwords have been set for the Sage and you wish to disable pass-
word protection, follow these steps:
2. In the Passwords dialog box, click the Change check box.
Password protection is now disabled for the Sage.

Using the HAZOP Cost Analysis
Feature 9
The HAZOP Cost Analysis feature is a helpful way to estimate the cost
of your HAZOP studies. To use this feature, follow these steps:
1. Choose HAZOP Cost Analysis from the Tools menu or choose the
HAZOP Cost Analysis icon( ) from the toolbar.
The HAZOP Cost Analysis dialog box appears:
Notice that there are two sections to this dialog box. When you
input data into the fields on the left side of the dialog box, the
estimated time and cost are displayed in the fields on the right side
of the dialog box.
2. Type information for each of the user-entered fields as described
below:
Fields Definition
Time per node The number of hours you estimate that
you will spend studying each node.
Session duration The estimated length of each session.
Num. of team members The total number of people on your
study team.
Cost per person-hour The average hourly cost for each mem-
ber of the study team.
Number of nodes The estimated number of nodes in this
study.
3. When youre done calculating the sessions and costs, click OK to

save the changes or click Cancel to exit without saving.

Using the Library
9
The PHAWorks Library feature provides a means for you to assemble
custom resource information for use during a study. For example, you
might have a company-specific checklist that is always used in your
HAZOP studies. You can store this checklist in a Library topic and
refer to it as you would the information in Analysis Tools.
The Library is also a convenient place to store the names and tele-
phone numbers of individuals who may be of assistance during the
study.
Here are some suggestions for using the Library:
Record abbreviations.
Using abbreviations can speed up data entry. In order for a team
leader to keep track of the meaning of the abbreviations, create a
Library topic that contains the abbreviation definitions. When
youre ready to complete a project, you can replace these abbrevia-
tions with the complete text using PHAWorkss Replace function.
Revise checklists.
You might want to enter your own company-specific checklists or
other resource information used while conducting a study.
Record issues.
Use the Library to record relevant issues that require further inves-
tigation, but are beyond the scope of a single study.
Define terms.
You can store brief explanations of terms in a library topic and
update them for each new project. This can be particularly helpful
to team members who are new to the study nomenclature.
Provide study examples.
Examples demonstrating how to conduct studies can be included
in the Library for easy access.
Accessing the Library
The Library is intended to be flexible so that you can store information

for one project or many projects. This means that you might want to
have only one Library that you use for all your projects or you might
want to have several Libraries that apply to different facilities or differ-
ent processes.

No matter how you use the Library, its important to remember that the
Library is independent from individual projects. This means that even
if you store a Library in a project directory, this information is not part 9
of the project file and can be accessed from any project.
To access the Library, you can:
choose Library from the Tools menu.
click the library icon in the toolbar ( ).
press CTRL+L.
If you have not yet created a library (or if the Library was not found in
the directory specified in the Locations page of the Options dialog
box), this message appears:
If you want to create the Library, click Yes. Otherwise, click No and
choose Options... from the Utilities menu to change the directory for
the PHAWorks Library.
Likewise, if a Library file already exists in the specified Library direc-
tory, but it was created using another HAZWARE product from
Primatech, this message asks you if you want to convert the Library
topics.
After you access the Library topic list, you can add, move, copy, re-
name and delete library topics. For step-by-step instructions, refer to
the section entitled Editing Lists in Chapter 7, Working with Data.
PHAWorks can handle up to 9,999 Library topics. Each topic can con-
tain up to 32KB of information.
To print a Library topic without opening it, select the topic name and
click Print. You can also select Print from the function menu or press
ALT+P.
Opening a Library Topic

To open a Library topic, follow these steps:
1. Choose Library from the Tools menu.
The Library dialog box appears:

9
2. Double-click a library topic (or select it and click OK).

The Library topic appears in a document window. Notice that the
menu bar changes to include the Library menu.
The Library menu contains these commands:
Command Description
Import Imports a text file into the current Library
topic.
Export Exports the current topic as a text file.
Passwords Sets or changes library passwords.
Subsequent sections provide instructions for these Library commands.
Editing a Library Topic
Entering information into a Library topic is similar to using a word

processor. To edit a Library topic, follow these steps:
1. Choose a topic from the Library dialog box and click OK or double-
click the topic to open it.
The library topic appears in a document window.
2. Type new information in the topic or edit existing information.
The Library automatically wraps the text when it reaches the right
margin.
The Edit menus Find, Replace and Undo/Redo Change Library
Topic commands also can be used in Library topics. For more
information about these commands, refer to Chapter 7, Working
with Data.
3. When you finish entering or editing the text, close the window
and return to the worksheet.

You can leave Library topics open and switch between worksheet win-
dows, Analysis Tools and Library topic windows. This is very conve-
nient for copying entries from an Analysis Tool and pasting them into 9
a Library topic.
Printing a Library Topic
To print and/or preview a library topic, follow these steps:

1. Press F2 while the topic is open.
or
Choose Print from the File menu while the topic is open.
or
Click the print icon ( ) in the toolbar.
or
Select a topic from the Library Topics dialog box and choose the
Print button.
2. Select the Print or Preview button from the Print Library Topic
dialog box.
Importing Text into a Library Topic
PHAWorks lets you import text files into the current Library topic. To
import text, follow these steps:
1. Open the topic and place the text cursor where you want the new
text to begin.
2. Choose Import from the Library menu.

9
3. Choose the text file you want to import and click Open.
PHAWorks inserts the text into the topic.
When importing text from WordPerfect documents, first save the
files as an ASCII DOS Generic Word Processor file. When import-
ing text from Word documents, first save the file as a Text Only
document.
Exporting a Library Topic
PHAWorks can export topics as text files. Follow these steps:

1. Open the topic you want to export.
2. Choose Export from the Library menu.
3. Type the name of the file you want PHAWorks to export the text to
and choose a location for the file from the Directory list.
4. Click Open.

Setting Library Passwords
9
schemes for the Library:
Specify a single password that is entered when opening the Li-
brary. This password provides full access (both viewing and edit-
ing).
Specify a password that is required only to edit the Library. This
scheme allows you to view Library topics without having to type a
password.
Finally, you can create a password for viewing the Library and a
separate password for editing the Library. This scheme allows
ers.
Library passwords are unique to the library and, for greater security,
should not be the same as the project password or the Sage password.
The default for a new Library is for no passwords to be used. To enable

1. Choose Passwords from the Library Topics dialog box (or Library
menu).

use and click OK.

9

5. Type the password(s) again in the Verify new password text field
steps:
1. Choose Passwords from the Library menu.
2. In the Library Password Setup dialog box, click the Change check
box.

change to (or, if youre going to change the password of the current

9
Disabling Passwords
If passwords have been set for the library and you wish to disable
1. Choose Passwords from the Library menu.
2. In the Library Password Setup dialog box, click the Change check
box.
Password protection is now disabled for the library.

Using File Maintenance Commands
9
The File Maintenance commands in the Utilities menu allow you to
copy, move, rename and delete project files. You can even copy and
move open projects.
Accessing File Maintenance

To access the File Maintenance commands, follow these steps:
1. Choose File Maintenance from the Utilities menu.
PHAWorks displays the File Maintenance submenu.
2. Choose a file maintenance command.
You cannot use the File Maintenance commands to copy, delete, move
or rename Library files. However, you can back up a library using
Windows Explorer, File Manager or the COPY command at a DOS
prompt.
Copying Project Files

The Copy Project command creates a duplicate of a project in another
directory, or with another name in the same directory. The new project
name can be the same as the original project name only if the file loca-
tion is different.
To copy a project, follow these steps:
1. Access the File Maintenance submenu in the Utilities menu.
2. Choose Copy Project.
The Copy Project dialog box appears:
3. In the Copy project... text field, type the name of the project to be
copied (or click the browse button to choose a project).

4. In the To... text field, type the destination directory for the copy of
the project (or click the browse button to choose a directory). You
can also type a new name for the copied project. 9
NOTE:
PHAWorks automatically adds the extension .*PW to file names
(or changes the extension, if you typed it incorrectly).
5. Check the Copy Archive Files check box if you want to copy the
projects archived files with the project.
6. Click OK.
This message appears in a message box:
Copy completed
7. Click OK.
Moving Project Files

The Move Project command transfers a project to a different location.
To move project files, follow these steps:
2. Choose Move Project.
The Move Project dialog box appears:
3. In the Move project... text field, type the name of the project to be
moved (or click the browse button to choose a project).
4. In the To... text field, type the destination directory for the project
(or click the browse button to choose a directory). You can also
type a new name for the moved project.
5. Check the Copy Archive Files check box if you want to move the
projects archived files with the project.
6. Click OK.

You are asked to confirm the move, after which this message ap-
pears in a message box:
Move completed
9
7. Click OK.
Renaming Project Files
The Rename Project command provides the most convenient means

for changing the name of an existing project while leaving the project
in the existing directory. To rename and change a projects directory,
use the Move Project function described earlier in this chapter.
To rename an existing project, follow these steps:
2. Choose Rename Project.
The Rename Project dialog box appears:
3. In the To... text field, type a new name for the project. (You cant
rename a project that is open.)
4. Click OK.
This message appears in a message box:
Rename completed
5. Click OK.
Deleting Project Files
Use the Delete Project command to delete a project. Follow these steps:
2. Choose Delete Project.
The Delete Project dialog box appears:

9
3. In the Delete project text field, type the name of the project you
want to delete (or click the browse button).
4. Check the Copy Archive Files check box if you want also want to
delete the projects archived files.
5. Click OK.
A confirmation message asks you to verify that you want to delete
the project. If you click Yes, this message appears:
Delete completed
6. Click OK.

Creating a Master Team List
9
You may find that you include the same individuals in a number of
study teams. By creating a master team list of these individuals, you
can save yourself the time of retyping teams for each project.
While you can update the master team list from the project team list
and copy entries from the master list to the project, these two lists of
team members are separate entities. Once you create a project team,
changes to the master team list do not automatically affect the project
list, and vice versa.
You might want to have only one master team list that you use for all
your projects or you might want to have several master team lists that
apply to different facilities or different locations.
The master team list, however, is independent from individual projects.
This means that even if you store a master team list in a project direc-
tory, this information is not part of the project file and can be accessed
from any project.
Accessing the Master Team List
To access the Master Team List dialog box, you can:

choose Master Team List from the Tools menu.
click the master team list icon in the toolbar ( ).
click Master in the Project team dialog box (or Team page in the
Sessions dialog box).
If you have not yet created a master team list (or if it was not found in
the directory specified in the Locations page of the Options dialog
box), this message appears:
If you want to create the master team list, click Yes. Otherwise, click No
and choose Options... from the Utilities menu to change the directory
for the PHAWorks master team list.

Adding Team Member Names to the Master
List 9
To add team member names to the master team list, follow these steps:
1. Access the Master Team List.
The Master Team List dialog box appears:
2. Click Add. (A confirmation message may ask if you want to switch

to edit mode. If so, click Yes.)
3. Enter information for each field and indicate whether you want
the team members name added to the list in the current position or
at the end.
History boxes retain a list of previously typed titles, phone num-
bers, locations, technical areas, qualifications and organizations.
You can select items from the history boxes instead of retyping the
same information.
member, click OK.

The following table describes the member information text fields:
Text field Definition 9
Name The full name of the team member
Title The members title
Phone The members telephone number
Location The city and state where the team member is
based
Department The department this team member works in
or represents
Qualifications The team members degrees or certifications
Technical area The team members specialty, if any
Comments Additional information about a team
members skills, schedule, etc.
Other Master Team List Functions
The Master Team List dialog box also lets you duplicate or delete team
members, print or merge lists. This table defines the buttons in the
dialog box:
Button/Icon Definition
Duplicate Opens the Duplicate Team Member dialog
box that contains the same information as the
selected team member
Delete Deletes currently selected team member
Details Opens the Team Member Details dialog box,
which lets you edit information about the se-
lected team member
Cut Cuts the selected member to the clipboard
Copy Copies the selected member to the clipboard
Paste Pastes the selected member to the clipboard
Print Prints the master team list
Merge Opens the Choose Team List to Merge dia-
log box, which lets you select a master team
list from another directory and merge it with
the currently open master team list

Copying Team Member Names to the Project
Team 9
Its easy to copy a team member from the master team list to a project
team list. Here are the basic instructions for this procedure:
1. Access the master team list.
2. Select a team member name and click the copy icon.
A Please Note dialog box appears, stating that the team member
name(s) you have chosen has been copied to the clipboard.
3. Click OK.
4. Close the Master Team List dialog box.
5. Go to the project into which you want to copy the new team mem-
ber name.
6. Choose Project Team... from the Project menu or Project Task
Center.
The Project: Team dialog box appears.
7. Click the paste icon.
A Please Note dialog box appears, stating that the team member
name(s) you have chosen has been pasted from the clipboard to
the project team list.
8. Click OK.
The copied team member name appears in the list.
Another method of copying Master Team member names to the project
list is:
1. Choose Project Team... from the Project menu or Project Task
Center.
The Project: Team dialog box appears.
2. Click on the Master button.
3. Select the team member name(s) you want to copy and click OK.
The selection is automatically copied into the project list.
Setting Master Team List Passwords
schemes for the master team list:

Specify a single password that is entered when opening the mas-
ter team list. This password provides full access (both viewing
and editing). 9
Specify a password that is required only when you try to edit the
master team list. This scheme allows you to view the team member
lists without having to enter a password.
Finally, you can create a password for viewing the master team list
and a separate password for editing the list. This scheme allows
ers.
Master team list passwords are unique to this feature and, for greater
security, should not be the same as the project or Library password.
The default for a new master team list is for no passwords to be used.
To enable password protection, follow these steps:
1. Choose Passwords from the Master Team List dialog box.

use and click OK.


5. Type the password(s) again in the Verify New Password text field
9
steps:
2. In the Master Team List Passwords dialog box, click the Change
check box.

switch to (or, if youre going to change the password of the current
6. Type the password(s) again in the Verify New Password text field

Disabling Passwords
If passwords have been set for the master team list and you wish to
9
disable password protection, follow these steps:
2. In the Master Team List Passwords dialog box, click the Change
check box.
Password protection is now disabled for the master team list.

Checking Spelling
9
To spell check your current worksheet, library or notes, follow these
steps:
1. Choose Spelling from the Utilities menu or click the Spell check
icon ( ) in the toolbar.
2. In the Spelling dialog box, click the radio buttons of the entries
and scope of the spell check:
This dialog box lets you specify if you want to spell check work-
sheet entries, banner fields or quick entry lists. (You can select as
many as apply.) You can also specify if you want the spell check to
start from the top (or first entry) of the current project or from the
current cursor position. Finally, you can check the spelling of the
current entry, only those columns in use or all columns.
3. For other spell check options, click the Options button.
These options are described later in this chapter.
4. To proceed with the spell checking, click OK.
If the spell checker finds an error, this dialog box appears:

5. To accept the suggested change, click Change. To ignore the sug-
gestion and continue with the spell check, click Ignore.
You can select Check Spelling from the library topic, session notes,
9
entry notes and banner notes function menus. When you spell check a
worksheet, the entry notes and banner notes are automatically spell
checked.
NOTE:
not currently shown within the worksheet, it will automatically
activate that column. An asterisk (*) will appear next to the
column
to indicate that it was activated automatically during the search
process. Upon exiting the worksheet, you will have the option to
add this column to the worksheet view.
Spell Check Functions

The following table defines all of the buttons in the Correct Spelling
dialog box:
Item Definition
Ignore Click this button to skip the misspelled word. If you
want the spell checker to ignore all instances of that
word, click Ignore All.
Add Choose this button to add the reported word to the
dictionary selected in the Add Words To: list (which
means that it wont be reported as a misspelled word
in the future).
Change Click this button to replace the reported word with
the word in the Change To box. If you want the spell
checker to replace all instances of the reported word,
click Change All. You can also double-click on the
suggested word.
Suggest This button is enabled only if either the Typographi-
cal suggestions or Phonetic suggestions option is en-
abled in the Spelling page in the Options dialog box.
Each time you select this button, a more intensive
search for replacements is conducted.
Lock Pos. If you select this check box, the dialog box will be
locked to its current position. Otherwise, the dialog
box changes position to let you see the occurrence of
the misspelled word in the text.

Options Opens the Options dialog box (which is described in
the following section).
Dictionaries Opens the Dictionaries dialog box, where you can 9
select another user dictionary, import a dictionary or
edit the contents of dictionaries.
NOTE:
The Added words file can be accessed through the Dictionaries
button on the Spelling page of the Options dialog box.
Spell Checking Options

When you click the Options button in the Spell Check dialog box or
choose the Spelling tab in the Options dialog box, these options ap-
pear:
Select the check box of each option you want to enable.

The following table defines each of the available options:
Option Definition
Dictionaries Click this button to access the spelling
dictionaries.
Ignore capitalized words Click this option if you want to ignore
all proper nouns or other words that be-
gin with a capital letter.
Ignore all-caps words Choose this option if you dont want the
spelling utility to stop at every instance
of an acronym or initialism (such as
those found in the BY column).

Option Definition
Ignore words with If your project frequently uses words
numbers with numbers (such as chemical formu- 9
las), you may want to select this option.
Ignore words with Click this option if you dont want to
mixed case spell check words that combine upper-
and lowercase letters (such as the names
of some companies).
Ignore domain names Choose this option if you want the spell
checker to ignore Web addresses, e.g.,
xyz.com.
Report doubled words This option alerts you if a word occurs
twice in succession (such as the the).
Case sensitive Enable this option if you want the spell
checking utility to make a distinction be-
tween capitalized words and non-capi-
talized words. When enabled, canada
would be considered different from
Canada and would be reported as a
misspelling.
Phonetic suggestions When enabled, suggestions are made on
the basis of phonetic (sounds-like) simi-
larity as well as typographical similarity.
This option tends to improve suggestions
for badly misspelled words. However, en-
abling this option will increase the time
required to locate suggestions. Note that
either this option or the typographical
suggestions option must be enabled for
suggestions to be offered.
Typographical suggestions When enabled, suggestions are made on
the basis of typographical (looks-like)
similarity.
Suggest split words When enabled, two separate words will
be suggested as a replacement for a mis-
spelling containing two joined words.
Auto correct When enabled, words marked with Auto
Change actions will automatically be
changed to their specified replacements.
Suggestions This option determines the speed and ac-
curacy of the initial search for suggested
replacements for misspelled words. You
can make the search fast but less accu-
rate, moderately fast and accurate, or slow
but accurate.

Customizing Accelerators
9
PHAWorks lets you create custom accelerators. The program is de-
signed with some default accelerators, but you can change the accel-
erators keys for many of them. Each command can have up to two
separate keyboard accelerators, so you should be able to configure the
program to meet your individual needs.
To create custom accelerators, follow these steps:
1. Select Options from the Utilities menu.
The Options dialog box appears.
2. Select the Accelerators tab.
The Accelerators page appears:
3. Choose a menu from the drop-down list at the top of the page.
The list of functions for that menu appears in the display field.
Note that some functions already have accelerators; these are the
programs default accelerators. Other functions do not have accel-
erators. You can change the existing accelerators or create accel-
erators for functions that dont have them.
4. Select the function whose accelerators you wish to change or cre-
ate.
If you select a function with a default accelerator, the key combina-
tion appears in the Primary Key field.

5. To change or create accelerators primary keys, click the browse
(...) button to the right of the field.
6. If you are changing accelerators, remove the existing key combina-
9
tion from the Current assignment: field by clicking the Delete
button.
The Press Key to Assign dialog box closes, and you can see in the
function list that the function you are working with no longer has
accelerators associated with it.
7. Click the browse button again to bring up the Press Key to Assign
dialog box.
8. If you are creating a new key combination, whether to define accel-
erators for a function that did not have them or to replace a
functions existing accelerators, press the keys you wish to use as
the accelerators.
For example, if you want to change the Open Project accelerator in
the File menu from CTRL+O to CTRL+ALT+Q, first click the De-
lete button to remove CTRL+O. Click the Browse button again,
then press the CTRL and ALT keys and continue to hold them
while pressing the Q key.
Or, if you wish to assign the accelerators CTRL+ALT+S to the Save
As function, select that function, click the Browse button, then
press the CTRL and ALT keys and continue to hold them while
pressing the S key.
The Press Key to Assign dialog box closes, and the changed or
new accelerators appear in the function list.
You can assign an additional key combination to a function by click-
ing the browse button to the right of the Secondary Key field and
following step 8.

Chapter 10 Generating
Reports 10
Documenting the results of your study is necessary in order to:

provide records for future reference.
ensure that recommendations are recorded.
generate lists of action items and memos to be distributed to
parties responsible for implementing them.
generate a final report on the study.
The PHAWorks Reports feature allows you to create such documenta-

tion.
You can generate reports at any time during a study. The contents of
each report can be tailored to your needs. For example, you can select
which worksheet columns should appear in a report. You can also
filter entries from the worksheet based on severity, likelihood and risk
values, and by category, priority, status and dates (as well as other
columns and fields). In addition, you can create HTML or PDF ver-
sions of your reports.
Generating Reports 10-332

Generating a Report
10
PHAWorks gives you a great deal of flexibility in choosing the kinds of
reports you can generate and in formatting the printed report. It en-
sures that your report contains the information you need, and that this
information is communicated in a meaningful way. This section ex-
plains the steps for generating a report. More detailed information on
each report type and report options follows.
To generate a report, follow these steps:
1. To generate a report for the current project, choose Reports from
the Project menu or choose the reports icon ( ) from the toolbar.
To generate a report for a project that is not open, choose Reports

from the File menu.
2. Select the project you want to print a report for and click Open.
The Reports dialog box appears, showing you the standard report
types:
For more information on each type of report, refer to the section in

this chapter entitled Understanding Report Types.
3. Select a report type.
4. To configure the appearance and content of the printed report,
click the Layout, Cover/Index, Page Setup, Options, Columns,
Banner or Filters tabs.

NOTE:
Accessing this tab allows you to complete the requested report as
an HTML/PDF report.
10
For more information about report banner and column layout op-
tions, refer to the section entitled Specifying Report Layout. For more
information about report options, refer to the section entitled Un-
derstanding Report Options. For more information on report filters,
refer to the section entitled Setting Up Report Filters.
5. To begin generating the report, click Print. To verify the format or
content of the report before printing it, click Preview.
For more information on previewing a report, refer to the section
entitled Previewing a Report.
Understanding Report Types

The Reports dialog box lists both standard and custom report types.
Custom report types are preceded by an open diamond. For more infor-
mation, refer to the section entitled Creating Custom Report Types.
The following table describes each standard report type:
Report Type Description
Worksheet This report contains the project data
in a form similar to the traditional
spreadsheet worksheet.
Action Items This report contains entries from the
Recommendations column and, op-
tionally, the related entries from the
other worksheet columns. Entries in the
Recommendations column are consid-
ered action items if they are not pre-
ceded by an asterisk or a colon.
Information Needs This report contains items from the
Recommendations column that are
identified as information needs and,
optionally, the related entries from the
other worksheet columns. Entries in the
ered information needs the first char-
acter in the entry is an asterisk (*).

Report Type Description
Individual Action Items This report contains only those Action
Items in the Recommendations column
10
that are assigned to a specific indi-
vidual or department, as indicated in
the related BY column. Entries in the
ered action items if they are not pre-
ceded by an asterisk or a colon.
Individual Information Needs This report contains only those Infor-
mation Needs items in the Recommen-
dations column that are assigned to a
specific individual or department, as
indicated in the related BY column. En-
tries in the Recommendations column
are considered information needs if the
first character in the entry is an aster-
isk (*).
User This report contains items from the
Recommendations column that are as-
sociated with BY column entries typed
as 1, 2 or 3 asterisks. This report also
can include related entries from other
worksheet columns.
Worksheet Summary This is a summary of the primary and
secondary division of a project, or a
summary of drawings and their asso-
ciated divisions.
Session This report contains the information
from one or more of the sessions listed
in the Sessions dialog box. This infor-
mation includes who was present, the
date, time and duration of the session
and member details.
Risk Statistical This report is a compilation of informa-
tion on severity or risk values assigned
in the worksheet. You can complete the
analysis on the Severity/Risk columns
before or after the Recommendation col-
umn. You can also complete an analy-
sis on user-entered S/R columns.
Statistical This report is a statistical summary of
the data entered into these columns:
Cause category, Consequences cat-
egory, Safeguard category, By, Recom-

mendation category, Priority, Status
and
Report Type Description 10
Comment status. The details are dis-
played by both percentage and num-
ber of occurrences. You can also com-
plete an analysis on these types of user-
entered columns.
Status Chart This report is available for the Check-
list technique. It shows you the percent-
age of Yes and Pending answers for
each division in the study.
Classification This report lets you create a report
based on a particular column. It uses
the Individual Action Items/Indi-
vidual Information Needs report for-
mat, but allows you to select which col-
umn you want to base the report on.
You can also complete an analysis on
these types of user-entered columns.
Protocol This report includes a list of the ques-
tions and answers (if any) in the
project protocols.
Creating Custom Reports
Creating a custom report lets you make copies of standard reports

available in the Reports dialog box and make modifications to the
copy.
To create a custom report, follow these steps:
1. Select the report type that you want to copy.
2. Click Create Copy.
A message asks you to confirm that you want to make a copy of the
selected report.
3. Click Yes.
The Name for Copied Report dialog box appears:

4. Type a name for the new report and click OK.
The custom report appears in the list. All custom reports are pre-
ceded by an open diamond.
10
Each report type has its own unique settings. Changing settings in one
report (or copy of a report) does not affect other reports. For more infor-
mation about changing report options, refer to the section in this chap-
ter entitled Understanding Report Options. For more information about
changing report filters, refer to the section in this chapter entitled Set-
ting Up Report Filters.
You can change the name of custom reports and delete custom reports.
To change the name of a custom report, follow these steps:
1. Select the custom report you want to rename.
2. Click the Rename button.
The Edit Report Name dialog box appears:
3. Type in the new name and click OK.

To delete a custom report, follow these steps:
1. Select the custom report you want to delete.
2. Click the Delete button.
The confirmation dialog box appears, asking whether you want to
delete the report.
3. Click Yes.

HTML and PDF Reports
10
PHAWorks allows you to create reports in HyperText Markup Lan-
guage (HTML) or Portable Document Format (PDF) files. These for-
mats are particularly useful if you share study information with indi-
viduals who dont have PHAWorks. These formats are also useful if
you want to post reports on your companys intranet system, over the
Internet (in a company Web site) or in an e-mail message.
NOTE:
In order to create a PDF report, you must already have purchased
and installed the Adobe Acrobat PDF print driver.
As with the other report types, you can generate HTML or PDF reports at
any time during a study. The contents of each report can be tailored to your
needs. For example, you can select which worksheet columns should
appear in a report. You can also filter entries from the worksheet based on
severity, likelihood and risk values, and by category, priority, status and
dates (as well as other columns and fields).
You can find filtering and formatting information later in this chapter. The
information contained in this section focuses on the HTML and PDF
options, and how to generate those types of reports.
NOTE:
You can open and save HTML reports in word processing
programs such as Word and WordPerfect.
Generating an HTML/PDF Report

This section gives you the steps for generating an HTML report.
Follow these steps:
1. To generate a report for the current project, choose Reports from
the Project menu or choose the reports icon (graphic) from the
toolbar.
To generate a report for a project that is not open, choose Reports...
from the File menu, after which you choose a project for the report.
The Reports dialog box appears, showing you the standard report
types:

10
2. Select a report type.

3. Click the HTML/PDF tab.
NOTE:
If PHAWorks does not find a copy of the Adobe Acrobat PDF driver
installed with the printer drivers under Windows, this dialog box
shows only HTML options.
The HTML/PDF page appears:

4. In the Output file field, type the directory and name for the report
file. (You must specify a file name in order to generate the report.)
You also have the option of clicking the browse button (...) to find
10
a directory or an existing HTML/PDF file:
If you dont select or type a directory, PHAWorks automatically

copies the file to the directory where PHAWorks was installed.
NOTE:
You must use the extension .HTM for HTML files or .PDF for PDF
5. If you want to view the completed report, click the View when
complete check box. If you want the HTML report to use the same
fonts you use when you print the report, make sure the Include
font size information in HTML check box is selected. PDF files
always use the same fonts that you use when you print your re-
ports.
6. To begin generating an HTML/PDF format report, click Create
HTML/PDF.
The HTML/PDF Generate dialog box appears while PHAWorks
creates the report. If you selected View when complete, the fin-
ished HTML report appears in the window of your Internet
browser:files. If you omit the extension, PHAWorks adds it auto-
matically.

10
Each of the underlined entries is a link to a portion of the report. To

go to a particular part of the report, click on the underlined text. The
HTML viewer jumps to that portion of the report.
The finished PDF report appears in an Acrobat Exchange window:

10
NOTE:
If the PDF print driver is installed, you can also generate a PDF file
by printing to the PDF Printer.

Specifying Report Layout
10
The Layout page of the dialog box includes items that affect the look or
numbering of the printed report:
For example, you can change the numbering of the report, add a footer
or center the report text. Each of the Layout items are defined in this
section.
Title
This item lets you specify a report title other than the standard
report name. (Specifying a new title does not change the current
report name, and vice versa.)
NOTE:
Individual Action Item and Individual Information Needs reports
use the definition value from the Quick Entry list as the default
report title, which cannot be changed.
Print banner on each page

Select this item if you want the information in the worksheet ban-
ner to appear on the top of each page of a worksheet that spans
multiple pages. (In a report, the banner always appears before
each new worksheet in a worksheet.)

Center report horizontally
Select this option if you want the contents of the report to be cen-
tered on the printed page. This option is useful for reports that 10
present information in columns.
Extend forms to bottom of page
Unless directed otherwise, the report ends a printed worksheet
form just below the last line of data. Since the amount of data
generally varies from one page to the next, the printed worksheets
tend to have nonuniform lengths.
Global footer
This option lets you specify text that appears at the bottom of every
page. The global footer is saved across all projects.
Specific footer
This option lets you specify text that appears at the bottom of every
page as an alternative to the global footer. For example, a footer
could identify the project or the date of the report.
Headings
This option lets you edit the company name, the facility being
studied and the label (name) accompanying the page number. The
company and facility names are taken from the Project Identifica-
tion. If no data was entered into those fields in the Project Identi-
fication dialog box, you may enter that data in the Company: and
Facility: fields in this section of the Layout page.
NOTE:
Changing the information in the Company: and Facility: fields
in the Layout page changes the banner header information on the
reports. It does not, however, change the company and facility
information on the cover page.
Numbering...
This option lets you specify where you want consecutive page
numbering to begin. (If, for example, a report follows other docu-
mentation that is nine pages long, the First page text field would
be on 10.) You can also specify a page Prefix (such as A-, 1- and so
on), and a page Suffix (such as -A, -1 and so on).
You have the option to Include Page Count when printing reports.
If you are printing a report without the table of contents and index,
and select this option, page X of XX will now be printed auto-
matically on each page. If you are printing a report with the table
of contents and index, and select this option, page X of XX will
now be printed automatically on each worksheet page, but not on
the table of contents and index pages. Those pages, however, will
be included in the page count.

New page for each primary division
Select this option to begin printing each division on a new page of
the report. Otherwise, the next division begins on the same page 10
where the previous division ended.
Restart page numbering
This item is available only if you select the previous item (New
page for each primary division). If you select this item, the report
restarts page numbering at the first page of each division. Other-
wise, the report numbers pages sequentially from first to last.
New page for each secondary division
This item is available only if you select New page for each second-
ary division. Select this option to begin printing each division on a
new page of the report. Otherwise, the next division begins on the
same page where the previous division ended.

Specifying Cover Pages and Indexes
10
To create cover pages and indexes for your reports, follow these steps:
1. Access the Reports dialog box for the project requiring a report
and choose the report type you want to generate.
2. Click on the Cover/Index tab.
The Cover/Index page appears:
3. To include a cover page, select Print cover page.

4. To include an index, select Print index. (Not all report types in-
clude the indexing feature.)
5. Continue selecting options for your report, or click Print or Pre-
view to begin generating the report.

Specifying Page Setup
10
The Page Setup dialog box lets you change how PHAWorks prints
reports and various other items (such as Analysis Tools, Library Top-
ics and project notes).
To set up pages for your report, follow these steps:
1. In the Reports dialog box, select the report type you want to gener-
ate and choose the Page Setup tab.
or
Click the Page Setup button from various Print dialog boxes (e.g.,
Print Project Identification).
The Page Setup dialog box appears:
2. Select a program group from the first drop-down list box (e.g.,
Common, Analysis Tools, etc.). The list box then displays only
those program items that are associated with the selected program
group.
NOTE:
A circle before a program item means that this item is also used in
other groups.

3. Select an item in the list box (e.g., Report Title, Normal Text).
4. Choose the Font, Text Color or Background, and make your selec-
tions.
10
5. You can also change the Margins of the printed item (Left, Right,
Top and Bottom).
6. Click OK.

Understanding Report Options
10
The number of items that appear in the Options page of the Reports
dialog box depends on the type of report being generated. For example,
the Worksheet Report, shown below, contains fewer options than other
report types:
The following sections define the options for each report type. Later in
this section, there are instructions for choosing a report banner and
report columns.
NOTE:
Some report types may not be available for every study method.
For instance, the Risk Statistical Report type is not available for
the Checklist method. However, all of the available report options
are described in the following sections.
Worksheet Options
A worksheet report asks you to specify the following option:
Include empty worksheets
A report normally excludes items that do not have any text in their
worksheets. If you select this option, the report includes empty
worksheets.

Print worksheet entry notes
Select this option to print worksheet entry notes in the report.
10
Action Items and Information Needs Options
Each action item or information need generated in the report is given a

reference number. The options for these reports deal in part with how
this reference number appears:
Include primary division number in reference number
Select this option if you want reference numbers in the report to
include the number for the primary division.
Restart reference number for each primary division
Select this option if you want reference numbering to restart for
each primary division in the worksheet.
If you are generating an Individual action items report or an Indi-
vidual information needs report, the dialog box also includes these
options:
Print actions/information needs for everyone
If you select this option, the report includes sections for each entry
found in the BY column. Also, if all is used in the BY column, the
associated entries will appear in every section of the report.
For whom:
For individual reports, you can specify whether the report should
contain sections for each entry in the BY column. You can use this
option to limit the report to information associated with specific
entries. Separate multiple recipients with commas.
If you have created a Quick Entry list for the BY column, you can
access that list by clicking the Browse button.
User Options
Each item generated in the User report is given a reference number.

The options for this report deal primarily with how this reference num-
ber appears:

Include primary division number in reference number
Select this option if you want reference numbers in the report to
include the number for the associated primary division. 10
Restart reference number for each primary division
Select this option if you want reference numbering to restart for
each primary division in the worksheet.
Include (*)(**)(***) items
For a User report, you must specify which items appear in the
report. There are three types of items, indicated by one, two or three
asterisks in the BY column. You can select any combination of
items to be included in the report.
Worksheet Summary Options
A worksheet summary report asks you to specify the following options:

Include empty primary and secondary divisions
worksheets. This options name varies, depending on the primary
and secondary divisions you selected for your study.
Sort on...
Primary division
Select this radio button if you want to sort the report in the order of
systems.
Drawings (or Documents)
Select this radio button if you want to sort the report in the order of
drawings.
Include...
Primary division notes
This item lets you include the studys primary division notes.
Drawings (or Documents)
This item lets you include the studys drawings.
Components
This item lets you include the studys components.
Secondary division
This option lets you include the studys secondary division.
Secondary division notes
This option lets you include the studys secondary division notes.

Secondary division intentions
This option lets you include the studys secondary division inten-
tions. 10
Guidewords
This option lets you include the entries in the Guidewords col-
umn.
Session Options
A session report asks you to specify the following options:
Print...
The All sessions, Current session and Some sessions radio but-
tons allow you to specify which session information in the Ses-
sions dialog box (if any) youd like to appear in the report. If you
select Some sessions, you must type the range of sessions (From
and To).
Print member details
Select this option if you want the report to include information
about the team members.
Print blank fields
Select this option if you want the report to include fields for which
no information has been specified.
New page for each session
Select this option if you want the printed report to start on a new
page for each new session included in the report.
Risk Statistical Options

A risk statistical report asks you to specify the following options:
Report Column
This option lets you choose whether to complete analysis of the
Severity or Risk column before or after the Recommendation col-
umn. You can also complete an analysis on user-entered S/R col-
umns.
Show empty primary and secondary divisions
Type
This item lets you choose the way the severity or risk values are
calculated and displayed. Choose Frequency to display the
number of times each value occurs. Choose Distribution to
display the number of times each value occurs as a percentage of
the total.

Field
This item lets you choose which values are displayed in the report.
Choose Severity to display the frequency or distribution of the 10
severity values. Choose Risk to display the frequency or distribu-
tion of the risk values.
Show subsystem (or other secondary division) detail
This option lets you include information on secondary divisions
in the report. This options name varies, depending on the pri-
mary and secondary divisions you selected for your study.
Compute...
Prioritization factors
Select this option to include the Severity Prioritization Factors
(SPF) in the report (see Appendix C for additional information
on SPFs).
Delimited factors
This option is only available if you have selected the previous
item. This option allows you to display the delimited factors within
a user-defined value range.
Values
If you have selected the previous option, enter a value between 0
99 in each box to define the range of values included in the report.
Statistical Options
A statistical report asks you to specify the following options:

Report Column
This option allows you to select the column from which the report
is generated. You can also complete an analysis on these types of
user-entered columns.
Show empty primary and secondary divisions
Report by
This option lets you choose from where (primary or secondary
division) you want the statistics to be gathered.
Select this option if you want to include worksheet information for
the subsystems.

Include blanks
Select this option if you want the report to include a column that
contains blank spaces. 10
Status Chart Options
A status chart report asks you to specify the following options:

Include empty primary and secondary divisions
Report by:
This option lets you specify if the report is organized by the pri-
mary or secondary division.
This option lets you include information on secondary divisions
in the report. This options name varies, depending on the pri-
mary and secondary divisions you selected for your study.
Pending answers
This item prompts you to supply the values used in the A column
for Pending answers (which can be any text you wish). Click the
browse button to access the Quick Entry list of values used for
Pending answers. Separate multiple values with a comma.
Include answered questions
This prompt lets you calculate the percentage of answers that are
blank. You must enter a value in the Yes and Pending fields to
generate this part of the report. If you dont choose this option, the
calculations include only the Yes and Pending answers of all an-
swered questions. By selecting this option, the calculations in-
clude unanswered questions, which changes the percentage of
Yes and Pending answers.
Calculate percentage based on weights
Status chart reports can also reflect the weight you've assigned to
each question. If you select this option, the status chart shows the
percentage completed based on weight. If you don't select this
option, the report is based on the total number of questions in the
worksheet.
Weight value for unweighted questions
This option appears only if you select the previous prompt and
lets you assign a temporary weight to any worksheet question that
doesn't have a weight value.

Classification Options
A classification report asks you to specify the following options:

10
Select this option to print worksheet entry notes in the report. You
can also complete an analysis on these types of user-entered col-
umns.
Attribute column
This option lets you select which column you want to base a report
on.
Protocol Options
A protocol report asks you to specify the following option:


Selecting Report Columns
10
When you are preparing to generate a report, all the worksheet col-
umns are available to be printed. This section provides instructions
for changing the column selections for reports (which apply to the
Worksheet, Information Needs, Action Items, Individual Information
Needs, Individual Action Items, Classification, Protocol and User re-
ports). It also gives you steps for generating a report that contains
current display columns and for changing the column width of your
report.
Follow these steps:
1. Click the Columns tab in the Reports dialog box.
The Columns page of the dialog box appears:
Columns to be included in the report are identified by a check

mark. To see all of the available columns, click the Show all col-
umns radio button. To see only those columns included in the
report, click Show included columns.
2. If you want a column to appear in the report, select the column
name and click Include. If you want to remove a column from a
report, select the column name and click Exclude. You can also
click the check box next to the column name. A column that has
been included is preceded by a check mark.

You can select a single entry or multiple entries. To select multiple,
contiguous items, click and drag. To select multiple, noncontigu-
ous entries, press CTRL and click. 10
NOTE:
These changes affect only the printed report, and do not affect the
display of worksheet columns.
The Total width for the included columns is displayed under the
Columns list box. The Maximum report width lists the width that
will fit on a printed page (according to your page and print setup).
3. To change the width of a column, select the column name and
click Width, then type in the new column width. The total width
includes any extra space needed between columns.
or
Select the column name and use the - or + buttons to decrease or
increase the columns width by 0.05 increments.
4. In the Width dialog box, type a new width for the column and click
OK.
5. If you want to the columns to fill the report page, select the Scale
columns to fill page check box. This will show the width of each
column in inches.
6. If you want to show the ratio of each column to the total width,
select Show percentages.
7. If you want to restore the default column settings for the report,
click the Defaults button.
NOTE:
If you restore the default report column settings, your settings will
be permanently overwritten.
8. When you have finished modifying the columns, click Print, Pre-
view or go to another page of the Report dialog box.
PHAWorks also makes it easy to generate a report that contains the
current display columns. Follow these steps:
1. Access the Reports dialog box for the project that requires a report,
and choose the report type you want to generate.
2. Click on the Columns tab.
The Columns page appears.

3. If you want the report to use the same column configuration you
used while working in the spreadsheet, select the Use current
display columns check box. 10
NOTE:
If you select this option, you cannot change the column widths or
percentages.
4. Continue selecting options for your report, or click Print or Pre-

view to begin generating the report.
You may wish to resize columns so that the selected columns better fill
the printed page. Changing column widths has no effect on HTML
reports. A PDF report, on the other hand, displays the columns exactly
as you configure them in the Columns page.

Selecting Report Banner Contents
10
For some report types, you can select how much of the banner you
want to appear on the generated report. These instructions apply to
the Worksheet, Information Needs, Action Items, Individual Informa-
tion Needs, Individual Action Items and User reports.
To select banner contents, follow these steps:
1. In the Reports dialog box, click the Banner tab.
The Banner page of the dialog box appears:
2. Select the banner items you want to appear in the report.

Descriptions of most of these settings appear earlier in this chap-
ter (see Understanding Report Options). There are two Global Set-
tings: you can also select, however.
3. If you want report banner labels to appear in all capital letters,
select the Use upper-case labels option.
4. You may also select the option to have all drawings listed on a
single line in the report banner. If you select this option, a semico-
lon (;) is used as the default separator between drawings. You can
change the separator, however, by selecting Combine drawings
with this between them, then entering the separator you want to
use.

Setting Up Report Filters
10
Filters allow you to limit the content of a report by selecting worksheet
data with certain values or ranges of values. For example, you can
specify that only systems within a ange be included in the report. If
you specify two filters (for example, Nodes 1 through 10 and the pa-
rameter Flow), items must match both filters to be included in the re-
port.
Filter criteria can be set up independently for each report type. This
section describes how to add, edit and delete filters.
Adding Filters
To add filters to your report, follow these steps:

1. In the Reports dialog box, select the report type you want to gener-
ate.
2. Choose the Filters tab.
The Filters page of the dialog box appears:
3. Click Add.
The Choose Filter Field dialog box appears:

10
4. Select a field and click OK.

Depending on whether the field you selected is a numeric, text or
date field, another dialog box prompts you to specify the filter
values and options.
5. Select the Operator and type the values you wish to use.
The sections entitled Selecting Numeric Field Values, Selecting Text
Field Values and Selecting Date Field Values provide more informa-
tion on how to specify information in these dialog boxes.
6. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the Filters page of the
dialog box.
The Filters page displays the new filter added to the list box. Make
sure the Use Filters check box is selected. If you wish to disable the
filters, make sure the Use Filters check box is not selected. This
feature lets you disable filters without deleting them.
Repeat the steps 3 through 6 to continue adding filters, if needed.
7. Click Print to generate the report and save the settings for a future
report. Clicking Close also saves the settings.
Selecting Numeric Filter Values
If the field you select in the Choose Filter Field dialog box is a numeric
field, this dialog box appears:

This dialog box lets you select an operator to use in the filtering state-
ment. Your choices are: Equal, Less or equal, Greater or equal and
Between or equal. In the Value field, enter a filter value or values. 10
Selecting Text Filter Values
If the field you select in the Choose Filter Field dialog box is a text field,
this dialog box appears:
ment. Your choices are: Is (matches the text string exactly), Contains
(the text string makes up a portion of the text field), Is not (text that
does not match the text string) and Does not contain (text that does not
contain the text string).
Enter a filter value into the Values field. If youre using more than one
value, separate each value with a comma. If the filter value includes a
comma, leading space or trailing space, enclose the value in quotation
marks (for example, Columbus, Ohio).
NOTE:
If you have created a quick entry list for a worksheet column, you
can access that list by pressing CTRL+E or clicking the browse
button from the Values field.
This dialog box also contains two check boxes. The first check box lets
you specify if you want the filter to be case sensitive (checks for upper-
and lowercase letters). If the filter is case sensitive, then all items must
exactly match the entered value to be included in the report.
The second check box lets you include items in the report if the selected
field is blank (for some fields).

Selecting Date Filter Values
If the field you select in the Choose Filter Field dialog box is a date 10
field, this dialog box appears:
ment. Your choices are: Is, On or before, On or after, and On or be-
tween.
Enter a filter date (or dates) in the Date field. (Make sure it is a valid
date.)
This dialog box also contains a check box that specifies if you want to
include items in the report if the selected field is blank.
Disabling Filters
To generate a report without filtering data, you can disable the cur-
rently specified filters without deleting them. Follow these steps:
1. In the Reports dialog box, select the report type whose filters you
want to disable.
The Filters page of the dialog box appears. The Use filters option
is selected as the default setting.
3. Click (uncheck) the Use filters check box to disable filtering.
4. Click OK.

Editing the Filter List
To edit the list of filters, follow these steps:
10
1. In the Reports dialog box, select the report type to be edited.
2. Choose the Filters button.
The Report Filters dialog box appears.
3. Select the filter you wish to edit.
4. Click Edit.
Depending on whether the filter you selected is a numeric, text or
date field, a filter dialog box appears that allows you to edit the
operator value.
5. Make the desired changes.
6. Click OK.
The Report Filters dialog box displays the revisions to the filter.
7. Click OK to close the Report Filters dialog box.
Deleting Filters
To delete filters, follow these steps:
1. In the Reports dialog box, select the report type you want to edit.
The Filters page of the dialog box appears.
3. Select the filter you want to delete.
4. Choose Delete.
A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm the deletion.
5. Press ENTER or click Yes.
6. Choose Print to generate the report and save the settings for a
future report. Choosing Close also saves the settings.

Previewing a Report
10
You can preview a report before printing it. Follow these steps:
1. Access the Reports dialog box.
2. Choose a report type and make any modifications to the report
options or filters.
3. Click Preview.
The report preview window appears:
Along the top of the window, a toolbar lists the preview pages in
this format: page X of XX (where X is the current page and XX is
the final page in the previewed page range). You can use this box
to access a specific page by typing the number of the page you
want to go. You can also scroll through the pages until you arrive
at the correct one.

The buttons along the top of the window are defined as follows:
Button Definition
10
Print Prints the report.
Next Page Goes to the next page in the report.
Prev Page Goes to the previous page in the report.
Two Page Shows two pages at a time.
Zoom In/Out Enlarges the report in the preview win-
dow or makes it smaller.
X of XX Identifies the current page from the total
number of pages.
Close Closes the preview window and returns
to the Reports dialog box.
Help Opens context-sensitive help.
4. The mouse cursor (shaped like a magnifying glass) allows you to

enlarge or reduce the document in the preview window. To en-
large or reduce the report, click the left mouse button. (Every click
of the left mouse button cycles through the preview sizes.)
5. To print the report, click Print.
6. To leave the preview window and return to the Reports dialog
box, click Close.
In PHAWorks 5, the report preview opens inside its own window, so
that you can access other items while previewing.
While viewing the report preview, use the scroll bars to move around
each page of the report. You can also use the vertical scroll bar to move
up and down through multiple pages of the report.

Appendix A PHAWorks
A
Viewer
The PHAWorks Viewer is a separate program that is shipped with

PHAWorks. This program allows you to view, but not edit, any
PHAWorks project. With this program, you can view data, review
projects and use other features that dont alter any of the project infor-
mation. This way, after a project is completed, anyone in the company
can study and print out the data, etc., but not change it.
Using the Viewer program is much like using PHAWorks itself. For
instance:
To open a project to view or review, go to the File menu and select
Open Project. When the Open Project dialog box appears, select a
project to view and click Open. The selected study opens and can now
be reviewed.
To print a project in the Viewer program, go to the File menu and select
Print or press F2. When the Print Worksheet dialog box appears, you
have the options, just as in PHAWorks, of printing worksheet entry
notes, previewing the pages before printing them and altering the page
setup. Make your selections, then click the Print button.
You can make formatting changes to a worksheet in the Viewer pro-
gram (such as increasing or decreasing column width, or changing the
font size in dialog boxes), but you cannot change any data in the work-
sheet.
PHAWorks Viewer Program A-367

Appendix B Glossary
B
A
Action item
An item identified during a study that requires follow-up; it is
entered in the RECOMMENDATIONS column of the worksheet.
Action Items Report
This report contains action items from the RECOMMENDATIONS
column, and the related entries from the other worksheet columns.
The format is similar to a Worksheet report. See also Individual
Action Items Report.
Analysis Tools
A utility in PHAWorks that provides resource information that
may be of use in conducting a study.
Asterisk (*)
Indicates an Information Need when it is the first character in an
entry in the RECOMMENDATIONS column. Also indicates a User
Report item when one, two, or three asterisks are entered in the BY
column.
B
Banner
The banner is the top several lines of the PHAWorks worksheet
window. The contents of the banner depend, in part, on the type of
study. For example, a complete banner for a traditional HAZOP
includes the session number and date, revision number and date,
node, parameter, components, drawings and intentions.
"
Boxes (" )
A solid box in a list marks nodes, parameters, steps, systems, etc.
that contains information in a worksheet. An open box indicates a
parameter that has been applied to a node but contains no work-
sheet data.
BY Column
This column allows you to designate the parties responsible for
items in the RECOMMENDATIONS column. You can use initials
or abbreviations to designate individuals or departments.
C
CAT Column
This column defines a category. There is a CAT column for causes,
consequences, safeguards and recommendations. Generally, you
Glossary B-368
type an abbreviation for the category in the CAT column. For ex-
ample, in the CAT column for RECOMMENDATIONS, you could
type H for Hardware item or P for Procedural item. B
Causes
Possible causes of the deviation determined by the hazard analy-
sis team to be realistic.
CAUSES Column
This column shows the possible causes (the means by which the
deviation could occur).
Chemicals
In the Project Identification dialog box, this field identifies the
chemicals used by the facility whose process is being studied.
Classification Report
A Classification Report uses the Individual Action Items/Indi-
vidual Information Needs report format, but allows you to select
which column you want to base the report on. You can, for in-
stance, base a report on the CAT, By, Priority, Status, Date or S/L/
R column, or even on a custom column youve created.
Clipboard
A temporary storage area used for copying or moving data.
Colon (:)
When entered at the beginning of a entry, the entry is not automati-
cally numbered; when used in the RECOMMENDATIONS col-
umn, the entry is not treated as an action item during report gen-
eration.
Column
A vertical section of text on a window or page. The PHAWorks
spreadsheet worksheet is divided into columns. See also Work-
sheet columns.
COMMENTS Column
A column in the PHAWorks worksheet intended for follow-up
review comments in response to items in the RECOMMENDA-
TIONS column.
Component
Hardware identified as being part of a node (for example, valve,
line or pipe).
Consequences
The effect if a deviation occurs. The consequences may vary de-
pending on the cause.
Glossary B-369
CONSEQUENCES Column
Use this column to record the potential effects of the hazard on
people, property and the environment. B
Cost analysis
A feature that allows you to estimate the amount of time and cost
involved for conducting a particular HAZOP study.
Control-menu box
For Windows 3.1, the Control-menu box is in the upper-left corner
of each window. Click this box to open the Control menu (for more
information, refer to your Windows documentation). This menu is
useful for moving, sizing and closing a window. Double-click the
Control-menu box to close a window.
D
Date Field Filter
A report filter for a date field requires that you type dates using the
following operators: Is, On or before, On or after, On or between.
You can also choose Include when field is blank, which means
that report will also include those items in the worksheet that do
not have an assigned date.
Default
The initial value in a field or initial program settings.
Design intention
How the facility or a particular node or element of a facility is
expected to operate under normal conditions (in the absence of
deviations).
Deviation
A departure from the design intention.
DEVIATION Column
This column shows the deviation from the parameter intent.
Diamond ( )
A solid diamond indicates a report type in the Reports dialog box.
An open diamond indicates a user-created report type in the Re-
ports dialog box.
Directory
An index of files on a disk.
Drawing number
The reference number of a figure used during an analysis.
Glossary B-370
E
Edit mode
The mode of operation of PHAWorks in which information can be
B
entered or changed. See also View mode.
END Column
Columns in the worksheet where dates relevant to the planned
end of recommendations or follow-up items can be recorded.
Entry
In the PHAWorks worksheet, an item or paragraph in a worksheet
column.
Execution authority
Authority files in a copy protection scheme. In order to run the
program, the execution authority files must be present.
F
Facility
The name of the site for which the study is performed.
File location
The combination of a disk drive and directory that gives the loca-
tion of a file or group of files; for example, C:\PHAWORKS.
FMEA
An abbreviation for the Failure Mode and Effects Analysis study
technique.
G
General parameter
A type of parameter often involving some type of activity (for ex-
ample, maintenance, testing and safety). See also Specific param-
eter.
Guidewords
Simple words or phrases used to qualify or quantify intention and
associated parameters in order to discover deviation.
Guideword/parameter combination
The application of a guideword to a parameter to generate a devia-
tion.
GW (Guideword) Column
This column shows the guideword that is being applied to the
selected parameter.
Glossary B-371
H
Hard return
A line break, inserted by pressing CTRL+ENTER, within a para-
B
graph. They are called hard returns because their position does
not change, unlike text wrapped automatically by PHAWorks.
Hazard
The potential for harm or damage to personnel, equipment, or the
environment.
HAZARD Column
A column in a worksheet that allows you to record potential haz-
ards.
Hazard scenario
The sequence of events that causes a hazard to occur.
I
Individual Action Items Report
An Individual Action Items report contains only those items speci-
fied in the RECOMMENDATIONS column that are assigned to an
individual or a department, as indicated in the BY column. See
also Action Items Report.
Individual Information Needs Report
An individual information needs report contains only those items
that are assigned to an individual or a department, as indicated in
the BY column. See also Information Needs Report.
Information need
An item recorded in the RECOMMENDATIONS column of the
worksheet that documents the need for additional information. It
is specified by typing an asterisk (*) as the first character of an
entry.
Information needed for Revalidation Protocol
The questions in this protocol concern the results of the previous
PHA and the actions taken on its results since its completion.
Information Needs Report
This report contains items from the RECOMMENDATIONS col-
umn that are identified as information needs, and the related en-
tries from the other worksheet columns. Information needs are
indicated in the worksheet by typing an asterisk (*) as the first
character in the RECOMMENDATIONS entry. See also Individual
Information Needs Report.
Intention
See Design Intention.
Glossary B-372
K
Key disk
The distribution diskette that must be in the diskette drive before a
B
copy-protected program will run.
L
L (Likelihood) Column
This column expresses the likelihood of the consequence scenario,
based on the agreed-upon definitions for the study. There are two
L columns: one for the likelihood of the consequence, and one for
the likelihood of consequences after the recommendations have
been implemented.
Library
A feature in PHAWorks that allows you to enter and store refer-
ence information useful for conducting and/or documenting stud-
ies.
Likelihood
The probability or frequency of occurrence of a hazard scenario.
Location
The geographic location of the facility for which the study is being
performed.
M
Maximize and minimize buttons
Click the maximize button to enlarge the active window to fill the
entire desktop. Click the minimize button to reduce the window to
an icon.
Message window
A window that contains error messages, informational messages
or warnings.
N
Node
A location on a process diagram (usually P&IDs or PFDs) at which
process parameters are investigated for deviations from the de-
sign intent. Nodes are therefore points where the process param-
eters have an identified design intent. Nodes are usually pipe sec-
tions or vessels. In a procedural study, the steps in a procedure
essentially become the equivalent of a node.
Node intention
Defines how the process is expected to operate in each node. The
node intention will be used to determine relevant parameters for
the process at that node.
Glossary B-373
Node number
A number that PHAWorks assigns to every node entered in order
to uniquely identify it. Node numbers may change as a result of B
deletions and insertions.
Node reference
Referring to nodes throughout the worksheet by node numbers.
Node number references must follow specific conventions in or-
der to be recognized by PHAWorks.
Numeric Field Filter
A report filter for a numeric field requires that you type a number
or range of numbers using the following operators: Equal, less or
equal, greater or equal, between or equal.
O
Objectives
In the Project Identification dialog box, this field specifies the types
of hazards to be treated, such as toxic releases, fires and explo-
sions, and the classes of consequences to be considered, such as
effects on people and potential impact upon property and the en-
vironment.
Outline Format
This export format allows you to take results from HAZWARE
Process Hazard Analysis (PHA) projects and extract data associ-
ated with the project. The outline format shows the hierarchical
relationships of data. This hierarchy depends on the column rela-
tionships set up in the PHA project. Every successive level in the
hierarchy is indented with a single tab.
P
P (Priority) Column
This column is used for designating the priorities of recommenda-
tions. You can devise any coding scheme that is meaningful to
you. For example, U for Urgent, M for Medium and so on. Only one
priority code can be entered for each recommendation.
Parameter
An aspect of the process intended function that describes it physi-
cally, chemically or in terms of what is happening.
Parameter intention
The parameter intention describes the normal, safe and operable
range that the process is expected to operate within at this node
under the study operating conditions. See also General parameter
and Specific parameter.
For procedural studies, the parameter intention is often a verb (for
example, open) or action-type phrase and can be described quan-
Glossary B-374
titatively (for example, open 100%) or qualitatively (for example,
open slowly).
Password
B
An alphanumeric code that must be provided to the program be-
fore the user is permitted to view or edit certain information; used
to restrict such activities to authorized individuals. The use of
passwords in PHAWorks is optional.
Procedural study
A formal review of written procedures.
Process
process being studied.
Program directory
The directory that contains the PHAWorks program and related
files.
Project
An analysis for a particular facility; also refers to the file generated
by PHAWorks for a particular study.
Projection pad
An electronic device that connects to a personal computer as a
display device and, in association with a transmissive overhead
projector, displays the image from the personal computer onto a
screen.
Protocol
A list of questions whose answers are stored in a database to pro-
vide a record of the conditions under which the study was con-
ducted. Completing protocols in PHAWorks is optional, but rec-
ommended.
PSI (Process Safety Information) Protocol
A protocol designed to help determine whether all the safety infor-
mation necessary to complete the study has been assembled.
Purpose
motivation of the study. For example, the purpose might be to re-
spond to government regulations, comply with company policy,
respond to an incident or to help allay public concern.
Q
Quick Access
A PHAWorks feature that allows you to quickly locate and move
to information in a worksheet.
Glossary B-375
R
R (Risk) Column
The entry in this column is automatically generated by PHAWorks,
B
based on the values in the S and L columns. The risk is determined
from a risk matrix, or grid, that assigns a risk ranking to each
combination of severity and likelihood. There are two R columns:
one for the risk of the consequences, and one for the risk of conse-
quences after the recommended action has been implemented.
Ranking
See Risk Ranking.
Recommendations
Activities identified during a study for follow-up and possible
implementation. Recommendations are often categorized as ei-
ther Action Items or Information Needs.
RECOMMENDATIONS Column
This column can be used for several types of items. Examples in-
clude recommendations for corrective actions in the facility, check-
lists of needed information, references to other items in the work-
sheet and general comments about the study.
Record Format
Export format that allows you to take results from HAZWARE
Process Hazard Analysis (PHA) projects and extract data associ-
ated with a recommendation. In this format, the data is in a list in
order of the columns in the source project.
Regulatory Requirements for Revalidation Protocol
A protocol designed to help determine whether a previously con-
ducted PHA met all the applicable regulatory requirements
Relevance
Denotes guidewords that are displayed for a particular parameter
based on whether they are considered to develop a meaningful
deviation when applied to that parameter.
REMARKS Column
This column in the worksheet is used for entering any information
that you wish to enter separately from the other columns. This
information is associated with the RECOMMENDATIONS col-
umn. Any number of remarks can be entered for each recommen-
dation.
Remedial action
An action item specifying a corrective action.
Revision number
A number that can be associated with edited versions of a work-
sheet.
Glossary B-376
Risk
A qualitative measure of the relative hazard (or significance of an
operability issue) of a scenario. Risk is a combination of the sever- B
ity and likelihood of the scenario. The risk is often used to help
prioritize recommendations.
Risk grid
A matrix showing the values of risk assigned to the various combi-
nations of severity and likelihood values.
Risk Ranking
The estimate of risk based on severity and likelihood, to provide
an ordering by risk.
S
S (Severity) Column
There are two severity columns: one that refers to the expected
severity of a consequence, and usually represents the worst-case
scenario, and one that refers to the expected severity of a conse-
quence after the recommendations have been implemented. The
value of the severity is determined according to definitions estab-
lished by the study team.
Safeguards
Protective features or measures to guard against or prevent haz-
ardous conditions from arising, or to mitigate their consequences.
SAFEGUARDS Column
Use this column to enter measures taken to prevent or mitigate the
risk of accidents. For example, pressure relief, preventative main-
tenance, deluge nodes and emergency response plans are safe-
guards for a node. These can be safeguards against CAUSES or
CONSEQUENCES, depending on how you set the column rela-
tionships.
Sage
A technical assistance utility, providing a database of causes for
deviations for a variety of common components.
Scope
boundaries of the study and critical interfaces to other systems.
There should also be a description of the relevant external events.
Scroll bar
Scroll bars enable you to move through a document or list when
the entire document or list does not fit in the window or the allot-
ted space. Click the scroll arrows with the mouse to move through
the list or text one line at a time.
Glossary B-377
Session
The part of a study conducted in one meeting.
Session number
B
A unique number assigned to each session by PHAWorks.
Session Report
This report contains the information from one or more of the Ses-
sions.
Severity
For a particular hazard scenario, the degree to which personnel,
property or the environment may be adversely affected.
Shortcut key
A keystroke combination that provides a shortcut to various tasks
(such as choosing menu commands). Keyboard shortcuts com-
monly combine CTRL and ALT keys with another key. For ex-
ample, CTRL+C copies currently selected item(s) to the clipboard.
ALT+A adds an item to a list.
Specific parameter
A type of parameter that describes a physical aspect of a facility
(for example: flow, temperature and pressure). See also General
Parameter.
START column
Columns in the worksheet where dates relevant to the planned
start of recommendations or follow-up items can be recorded.
Statistical Report
This report is a compilation of information on severity or risk val-
ues assigned in the worksheet.
Status columns
Columns in the worksheet where the status of items can be re-
corded. Column X records the recommendation status, and col-
umn Y records the follow-up status.
Status line
This is the line at the bottom of the PHAWorks window and con-
tains messages and instructions about the current function or com-
mand.
Step
A division of a procedure at which the parameters are investi-
gated for deviations from the intent. Depending upon the format of
the procedure, each step or action in the procedure essentially
becomes the equivalent of a node.
Glossary B-378
Step intention
Describes what is intended to be accomplished at this step in the
procedure. The step intention is used to determine relevant pa- B
rameters for the process at the step.
Subsystem
A formal part of a system structure.
System
A formal part of a facility.
T
Technical requirements for Revalidation Protocol
This protocol helps determine whether all technical elements of a
previously conducted PHA were properly addressed.
Text Field Filter
A report filter for a text field requires that you type words or phrases
using the following operators: Is, is not, contains or does not con-
tain. You can also choose Include when field is blank, which
means that report will also include those items in the worksheet
that do not have an assigned value, or Case sensitive compares,
which means that the report will include those items that match
the case of the text youve typed.
Text file
A file containing only characters that can be read without the use
of a specific program.
Title bar
The title bar shows the name of the application, project, Library
topic, Analysis Tools topic, window or dialog box. If more than
one window is open, the title bar for the active window (the one in
which you are working) has a color or intensity different from
other title bars.
Traditional HAZOP study
A formal review of a facility to identify potentially hazardous
events or operability problems.
Tutorial
A feature in PHAWorks that provides technical assistance in con-
ducting HAZOP and What If studies.
U
User Report
This report contains items from the RECOMMENDATIONS col-
umns, and the related information from other worksheet columns.
Only items with one or more asterisks (*, ** or ***) in the BY column
are included. The format is similar to a Worksheet report.
Glossary B-379
V
View mode
A mode of operation that permits the user to view information
B
without making changes to that information. See also Edit mode.
W
Wildcard
The asterisk (*) and question mark (?) characters used in a filename
to represent one or more characters. The * represents from one to
eight characters. The ? represents a single character.
Worksheet
The form in which study results are recorded. PHAWorks pro-
vides two worksheet formats for editing information (Spreadsheet
and Datasheet) and a worksheet format for reviewing or navigat-
ing within worksheet information (Tree).
Worksheet columns
The various columns of information that make up the project work-
sheet.
Worksheet Report
This report contains the project data in a form similar to the spread-
sheet worksheet format.
Worksheet revision
A revision of a worksheet is, in effect, a snapshot of that worksheet
at a given time. Creating and comparing revisions of a worksheet
documents the history of a project, providing information about
how a project has changed over time.
Worksheet Summary Report
This is a summary of the nodes and parameters, steps and param-
eters, or systems and subsystems for a project, or a summary of
drawings and the items associated with them.
X
X (Recommendation status) Column
This column is used to designate the status of recommendations.
As with the Y (Follow up status) column, you can use a code to
designate status. For example, C for Complete, P for Pending and
so on. Only one status code can be entered for each recommenda-
tion.
Y
Y (Follow-up status) Column
This column is used to designate the status of follow-up items. As
with the X (Recommendation status) column, you can use a code
to designate status. For example, C for Complete, P for Pending
Glossary B-380
and so on. Only one status code can be entered for each item in the
COMMENTS column.
B
Glossary B-381
Appendix C Definitions
C
of Risk and Severity
Prioritization Factors
Assuming that severity level 1 is associated with the highest severity,

then the SPF is computed as follows:
Given: i = a specific severity level
m = the severity level associated with the low-
est severity
Si = the severity value associated with severity
level i (typically, Si = i)
Sm = the severity value associated with the low-
est severity (typically, Sm = m)
ni = the number of occurrences of the ith severity
value
m
Then: SPF =
i=1
[ ((S m
+ 1) Si ) * ni ]
However, if you define severity level 1 as the level with the lowest sever-
ity, the SPF is computed as follows:
Given: m = the severity level associated with the highest
severity
m
Then: SPF =
i=1
[S * n]
i i
Formal Definitions of Risk and Severity Prioritization Factors C-382

Assuming that risk level 1 is associated with the highest risk, then the
RPF is computed as follows:
Given: i = a specific risk level
C
m = the risk level associated with the lowest risk
Ri = the risk value associated with risk level i
(typically, Ri = i)
Rm = the risk value associated with the lowest risk
(typically, Rm = m)
n i = the number of occurrences of the ith risk value
m
Then: RPF =
i=1
[ ((R m
+ 1) Ri ) * ni ]
As with calculations of the SPF values, if you define risk level 1 to be the
level with the lowest risk, then the RPF is calculated as follows:
Given: m = the risk level associated with the highest risk
m
Then: RPF =
i=1
[R * n]
i i
Example Calculations:
The following example assumes the highest severity, likelihood, and risk
are assigned level 1, and the risk grid looks as follows:
SEVERITY
L 1 2 3 4
I
K 1 1 2 3 4
E
L 2 2 3 4 6
I
H
3 3 4 5 7
O
O
D 4 4 6 7 8

For two hazard scenarios, the consequences and associated S, L, and R
values are as follows:
C
Hazard scenario 1 S L R
Consequence 1 2 4 6
Consequence 2 4 3 7
Consequence 3 3 2 4
Consequence 4 2 4 6
Consequence 5 1 4 4
Hazard scenario 2 S L R
Consequence 1 3 2 4
Consequence 2 4 2 6
Consequence 3 3 1 3
Consequence 4 2 3 4
Consequence 5 3 1 3
The SPF for hazard scenario 1 would be calculated as follows:
i = 1 to 4
m =4
S1 =1 n1 =1
S2 =2 n2 =2
S3 =3 n3 =1
S4 =4 n4 =1
SPF = (4 + 1 - 1) * 1 + (4 + 1 - 2) * 2 +
(4 + 1 - 3) * 1 + (4 + 1 - 4) * 1
SPF = 13
Similarly, the SPF value for the second hazard scenario is calculated to be
10.
In comparing the two calculated SPF values, you see that the SPF value for
hazard scenario 1 is slightly greater than that for hazard scenario 2. This is
to say that, in the study group's opinion, the consequences of hazard sce-
nario 1 would be more severe than those related to the second scenario.

The RPF for hazard scenario 1 would be calculated as follows:
i = 1 to 8 C
m =8
R1 =1 n1 =0
R2 =2 n2 =0
R3 =3 n3 =0
R4 =4 n4 =2
R5 =5 n5 =0
R6 =6 n6 =2
R7 =7 n7 =1
R8 =8 n8 =0
RPF = (8 + 1 - 4) * 2 + (8 + 1 - 6) * 2 + (8 + 1 - 7) * 1
RPF = 18
The RPF value for the second hazard scenario is equal to 25.
In comparing the two RPF values, one sees that the RPF value for hazard
scenario 2 is greater than that for hazard scenario 1. This is the say that, in
the study group's opinion, the risk of hazard scenario 2 is higher than that
of scenario 1.
Confusion may arise in looking at both the SPF and RPF values. Since the
SPF value for scenario 1 was larger than that for scenario 2, someone may
believe that the RPF values will also follow a similar trend. As was illus-
trated in the previous example, this is not the case. Since risk is determined
through a combination of severity and likelihood, the values calculated in
the example illustrate that the consequences of scenario 1 are more severe
than scenario 2, but the risk of the consequences of scenario 2 are greater
than scenario 1 because the consequences of scenario 2 are more likely to
occur than those in scenario 1.

Index
Symbols
.CPW 2-48
.FPW 2-48
.HPW 2-48
.LPW 2-48
.PPW 2-48
.PWA 2-48
.RPW 2-48
.SPW 2-48
.WPW 2-48
A
About Dialog Box 4-153
Accelerators 1-34, 4-130, 9-330
Primary Key 9-330
Secondary Key 9-331
Action Items Report 10-334
Analysis Tools 9-291
Opening 9-291
Printing 9-293
Selecting Text 9-293
Archive Information 3-82, 3-90
asterisk 4-134
Automatic Numbering. See Column Numbering
B
Backing Up Projects 4-147
Timed Automatic Backup 4-147
Banner 7-212
Access Worksheet Lists 7-213
Combining Drawings with Separators 7-216
Converting Banner Labels to Uppercase 7-215
Hiding 7-213
Hiding Banner Fields 7-215
Moving Between Banner and Worksheet 7-212
Renaming Banner Fields 7-215
Zooming In 7-214
Zooming Out 7-214
Banner Configuration 2-75, 3-110, 6-193
Changing Banner Names 6-194
Bookmarks 4-128
Adding 4-128
Index 386
Deleting 4-129
Moving Between 4-129
C
Categories 2-72, 3-108, 7-207. See also Dialog Boxes
Change Worksheet Format 6-178. See also Worksheet Formats
Choosing Worksheet Information. See Proceeding to the Worksheet
Classification Report 10-336
Close All 4-154
Closing Projects 4-154
Close All 4-154
Closing Windows 4-154
Close All 4-154
Column Configuration 1-27, 2-52, 3-93, 6-182. See also Column Numbering
Adding Columns 2-55, 6-186
Changing Column Names 6-183
Changing Column Relationships 2-54, 6-191
Changing Column Widths 6-182
Deleting Columns 2-58, 6-189
Moving Columns 2-53, 6-190
REF# 1-27
Column Numbering 1-28, 6-184, 8-281. See also Column Configuration
Enabling References 8-282
Column Relationships 3-95, 6-191. See also Column Configuration
Components 7-207, 9-298. See also Dialog Boxes; Sage
Configuration Data 1-36
Contacting Primatech 23, 1-42, 4-153
Converting Projects 4-149
Converting a DOS-Based Project File 4-152
Converting an Older PHAWorks Project File 4-150
Copying Information from Another Project 2-78, 3-112, 8-285
Copyright 2
D
Data. See Worksheet Data
Data Locations 1-37
Data Stored at the User Level 1-38
Data Stored in a Worksheet 1-39
Data Stored with a Project 1-38
Data Stored with the Program Information 1-37
Datasheet Format 4-124, 5-164, 6-178
Deviations 7-207. See also Dialog Boxes
Dialog Box Tips 4-118
Dialog Boxes 7-207
Adding a New Item 7-208
Copying an Item 7-210
Deleting an Item 7-208
Index 387
Duplicating an Item 7-209
Moving an Item 7-210
Pasting an Item 7-210
Renaming an Item 7-208
Display Setup 6-201
Background Colors 6-204
Fonts 6-203
Text Colors 6-204
Documents 7-207. See also Dialog Boxes. See Drawings
Drawings 1-31, 2-66, 3-102, 7-207. See also Dialog Boxes
E
Enter Data Method 3-87
Entry Notes 7-225
Adding 7-225
Editing 7-226
Viewing 7-225
Entry Numbering. See Column Numbering
Exporting Project Data 1-31, 8-277
Comma delimited 8-277
Filters 8-279
Options 8-278
Outline 8-277
Record list 8-277
F
File Maintenance 1-35, 9-315
Copying Project Files 9-315
Deleting Project Files 9-317
Moving Project Files 9-316
Renaming Project Files 9-317
Find 1-31, 7-221, 8-259
Font Attributes 4-142
Reformatting Text 4-142
Font Size in Dialog Boxes 1-31, 4-143, 6-195
Format Text 1-32, 4-142, 7-223
Function Keys 4-133
G
Guidewords 7-207. See also Dialog Boxes
H
HAZOP Cost Analysis 9-306
Help 23, 1-42, 4-153
Hiding Columns in a View 6-185
HTML and PDF Reports 10-338
HTML Reports 10-338
Index 388
Hyperlinks 1-33, 7-249
Creating Hyperlinks 7-249
Deleting Hyperlinks from a List 7-251
Deleting Hyperlinks from a Worksheet 7-254
Editing Hyperlinks in a List 7-251
Editing Hyperlinks in a Worksheet 7-253
Inserting Hyperlinks into a Worksheet 7-252
Running Hyperlinks from a List 7-251
Running Hyperlinks from a Worksheet 7-253
I
Individual Action Items Report 10-335
Individual Information Needs Report 10-335
information need 4-134
asterisk 4-134
Information Needs Report 10-334
Initial PHA 2-45
Installing PHAWorks 1-40
Network Installation (Network Key) 1-41
Stand-Alone Installation (Floppy Key) 1-40
Stand-Alone Installation (Hard Disk Key) 1-40
K
Keyboard Shortcuts 4-130
Accelerators 4-130
Control Key Combinations 4-131
Cursor Control Keys 4-130
Function Keys 4-133
L
Library 7-207, 9-307. See also Dialog Boxes
Accessing 9-307
Editing 9-309
Exporting 9-311
Importing Text 9-310
Opening 9-308
Passwords 9-312
Changing 9-313
Disabling 9-314
Enabling 9-312
Printing 9-310
Likelihood pop-up legend 5-165
Lists (Dialog Boxes). See Dialog Boxes
Locations 4-137
M
Master Team List 9-319
Index 389
Accessing 9-319
Adding Team Member Names 9-320
Copy 9-321
Copying Team Member Names to the Project Team 9-322
Cut 9-321
Delete 9-321
Details 9-321
Duplicate 9-321
Merge 9-321
Passwords 9-322
Changing 9-324
Disabling 9-325
Enabling 9-323
Paste 9-321
Print 9-321
Menu Additions 1-36
Menu Changes 1-35
Modifying Worksheet Columns. See Column Configuration
N
Naming the New Project 2-47
PHA Project Method 2-47
Navigating 4-126
Bookmarks 4-128
Control Key Combinations 4-131
Cursor Control Keys 4-130
Function Keys 4-133
Jump Backward 4-126
Jump Forward 4-126
Quick Access 4-126
New Projects 5-156
New Worksheet Format 4-122. See also Worksheet Formats
Nodes 2-72, 7-207. See also Dialog Boxes
Parameters 3-109
Numbering (Columns). See Column Numbering
Numbering (Dialogs) 1-29, 8-284
Numbering Worksheet Entries. See Column Numbering
O
Opening a Project 4-119
Opening a Worksheet. See Proceeding to the Worksheet
Options 4-138
Accelerators 9-330
Backup 4-147
Display 6-201
Locations 4-137
Preferences 4-138
Index 390
Spell 9-326
Toolbar 6-197
P
Page Setup 4-144
Parameters 3-109, 7-207. See also Dialog Boxes
Passwords 8-256
Changing 8-257
Disabling 8-258
Enabling 8-256
PDF Reports 10-338
PHA Project Method 2-47
PHAWorks Files 1-43
PHAWorks Program Window 4-116
PHAWorks Viewer 1-27
Preface 17
Preferences 4-138
Check if Guideword Entries Are in Guideword Lists 4-140
Confirming Drag-and-drop in Dialog Boxes 4-140
Confirming the Change to Edit Mode 4-140
Displaying Dates Using the Long Format 4-139
Enabling the Protocols Prompter 4-140
Enabling the Severity and Likelihood Pop-up 4-139
Enabling the Show Entry Note Indicator 4-141
Printing Dates Using the Long Format 4-139
Saving a Project 4-140
Setting the Exit Verification Option 4-138
Setting the Maximum Number of Lines - Column Names 4-141
Setting the Overwrite Option 4-139
Showing Dialog Box Tips 4-140
Use Sage for Automatic Deviations 4-139
Presentation Conventions 22
Print Setup 4-144
Printing 4-144
Printing Dates Using the Long Format 4-139
Proceeding to the Worksheet 2-80, 3-114
Project Configuration 1-26, 2-50, 3-93
Automatic Prompt 2-50, 3-94
Breakdown of Study 2-51, 3-94
Drawing Relationship 2-51, 3-94
Use of Notes 2-51, 3-94
Using Check Marks 2-51, 3-95
Using Quick Entry Lists 2-51, 3-95
Project Identification 1-31, 2-61, 3-97, 8-260
Project Modifications 1-30
Project Notes 2-63, 3-99, 8-259
Project Risk Ranking. See Risk Ranking
Index 391
Project Task Center 2-60, 4-120
Project Information 2-60
Project Options 2-75
Project Team 2-64, 3-100, 8-267
Adding a Team Member 8-267
Copy 8-270
Cut 8-270
Delete 8-270
Deleting a Team Member Entry 8-269
Details 8-270
Duplicate 8-270
Editing Team Member Information 8-269
Master 8-270
Paste 8-270
Print 8-270
Project Type 2-46
Initial PHA 2-46
Revalidation PHA 2-46
Update PHA 2-46
Project Windows 4-122
Protocol Report 10-336
Protocols 2-59, 3-83, 3-92
Information needed for Revalidation 3-84
Process Safety Information (PSI) needed for PHA 3-83
Prompter 2-59, 4-140
Protocol List 2-59
Questions 3-84
Regulatory requirements for Revalidation 3-84
Technical Requirements for Revalidation 3-84
Worksheet 3-92
Q
Quick Access 4-126, 5-167
Quick Copy 8-288
Quick Entry 5-168, 7-207, 7-227. See also Dialog Boxes
Accessing Quick Entry Lists 7-228
Adding a Quick Entry Item to a List 7-230
Changing Location of the Global Quick Entry List 7-231
Configuring Quick Entry Lists 7-227
Deleting a Quick Entry Item from a List 7-230
Index 7-232
Adding a Section 7-234
Deleting a Section 7-234
Enabling an Index 7-232
Renaming a Section 7-235
Inserting Text from a Quick Entry List 7-229
Printing Quick Entry Lists 7-231
Index 392
Using Default Quick Entry Lists 7-229
R
Recommendations 4-134
asterisk 4-134
Redo 1-27
REF# 1-27
References 7-236, 8-282. See also Column Numbering
Accessing 7-238
Changing 7-237
Creating 7-236
Enabling Entry Referencing 8-284
Typing References Manually 7-238
Using Key Expressions 7-239
Using Separators 7-239
Replace 1-31, 7-222, 8-259
Replace/Redo Revalidation 3-85
Report Banner 10-359
Report Columns 10-356
Report Cover Page 10-346
Report Filters 10-360
Adding 10-360
Date Filter 10-363
Numeric Filter 10-361
Text Filter 10-362
Deleting 10-364
Disabling 10-363
Editing 10-364
Report Index 10-346
Report Layout 10-343
Report Options 10-349
Action Items Options 10-350
Classification Options 10-355
Information Needs Options 10-350
Protocol Options 10-355
Risk Statistical Options 10-352
Session Options 10-352
Statistical Options 10-353
Status Chart Options 10-354
User Options 10-350
Worksheet Options 10-349
Worksheet Summary Options 10-351
Report Page Setup 10-347
Report Preview 1-33, 5-174, 10-365
Report Types 10-334
Action Items 10-334
Classification 10-336
Index 393
Individual Action Items 10-335
Individual Information Needs 10-335
Information Needs 10-334
Protocol 10-336
Risk Statistical 10-335
Session 10-335
Statistical 10-335
Status Chart 10-336
User 10-335
Worksheet 10-334
Worksheet Summary 10-335
Reports 1-32, 5-172, 10-332
Generating 10-333
Reports (Custom) 10-336
Restart Worksheet Changes 7-248
Revalidating a PHAWorks Compatible Project 3-82
Revalidating Project Not Compatible with PHAWorks 3-87
Revalidation Method 3-88
Revalidation Project 3-85
Replace/Redo 3-85
Revise/Retrofit 3-85
Revise/Retrofit Revalidation 3-85
Revisions 1-29, 7-240
Comparing 7-243
Deleting 7-244
Editing the Revision Number 7-245
Revision List 7-240
Start New Revision 7-240
View in Current Window 7-242
View in New Window 7-242
Viewing 7-242
Revisions for All Worksheets 7-244. See also Revisions
Risk Grid 8-275. See also Risk Ranking
Risk Prioritization Factors C-382
Risk Ranking 1-34, 2-76, 3-111, 8-271, 8-274
Accessing 8-271
Editing the Severity and Likelihood Levels 8-274
Adding a Severity or Likelihood Level 8-274
Deleting a Severity or Likelihood Definition 8-275
Editing a Severity or Likelihood Level 8-275
Likelihood pop-up legend 5-165
Loading 8-273
Saving 8-273
Severity pop-up legend 5-165
Risk Statistical Report 10-335
Index 394
S
Sage 7-207, 9-295. See also Dialog Boxes
Accessing 9-297
Adding a New Component or Cause 9-298
Choosing Causes from Sage 9-295
Deleting a Component or Cause 9-299
Deviation List 9-301
Adding 9-302
Deleting 9-302
Editing 9-303
Duplicating Existing Components 9-299
Editing a Component or Cause 9-300
Finding Text in Sage 9-300
Passwords 9-304
Changing 9-305
Disabling 9-305
Enabling 9-304
Printing 9-301
Save 1-26, 4-140, 4-147
Save Project As 1-26
timed automatic backup 1-26
Save Project As 1-26
Saving Projects 4-147
Searching. See Find
Select Column 7-218
Select Entry 7-218
Select Worksheet 7-218
Session Report 10-335
Sessions 2-68, 3-104, 8-262
Accessing 8-262
Adding 8-263
Changing Session Details 8-264
Changing the Current Session 8-264
Choosing 8-262
Deleting 8-264
Notes 8-266
Recording Team Attendance 8-265
Severity pop-up legend 5-165
Severity Prioritization Factors C-382
Show Worksheet Changes 7-247
Show: All views 6-180
Show: Current columns 6-180
Show: Current view 6-180
Showing Columns in a View 6-185
Spell 1-33, 9-326
Functions 9-327
Options 9-328
Index 395
Spreadsheet Format 4-123, 6-178
Statistical Report 10-335
Status Chart Report 10-336
Steps 2-72, 3-108, 7-207. See also Dialog Boxes
Subsystems 7-207. See also Dialog Boxes
Support 23, 1-42, 4-153
System Requirements 21
Systems 2-72, 3-108, 7-207. See also Dialog Boxes
T
Technical Support 23, 1-42, 4-153
Technique Tutorial 4-153
Timed Automatic Backup 1-26, 4-147
Toolbar 1-34, 4-117, 6-197
Moving the Toolbars 6-199
Positioning Icons 6-199
Removing Icons 6-198
Track Worksheet Changes Features 1-30
Tracking Worksheet Changes 7-247
Restart Worksheet Changes 7-248
Show Worksheet Changes 7-247
Track Worksheet Changes 7-247
Trademarks 2
Tree Format 4-125, 6-178
U
Undo 1-27
Update PHA 3-90
Updating a Project Not Compatible with PHAWorks 3-87
Enter Data Method 3-87
Revalidation Method 3-88
User Report 10-335
V
Viewing a Worksheet. See Proceeding to the Worksheet
Views. See Worksheet Views
W
Whats in This User Guide 18
Whats New in PHAWorks 5 1-26
Worksheet Data 4-134, 7-217
Copying Noncontiguous Entries 7-220
Deleting Entries 7-220
Entering Data 4-134
Entry Notes 7-225
Adding 7-225
Editing 7-226
Index 396
Viewing 7-225
Font Attributes 4-142
Inserting Entries 7-219
Joining Entries 7-218
Moving Between Entries 4-135
Reformatting Text 4-142, 7-223
Replacing 7-222
Searching 7-221
Select Column 7-218
Select Worksheet 7-218
Selecting Entries 7-217
Splitting Entries 7-219
Typing in Worksheet Columns 4-134
Using the Clipboard 4-136
Worksheet Formats 4-122, 5-163, 6-178
Change Worksheet Format 6-178
Datasheet 6-178
Datasheet Format 4-124
Datasheet format 5-164
New Worksheet Format 4-122
Spreadsheet 6-178
Spreadsheet Format 4-123, 5-163
Tree 6-178
Tree Format 4-125
Worksheet Modifications 1-30
Worksheet Numbering. See Column Numbering
Worksheet Report 10-334
Worksheet Summary Report 10-335
Worksheet Views 6-179
Customizing 6-180
Hiding and Showing Columns in a View 6-185
Show: All views 6-180
Show: Current columns 6-180
Show: Current view 6-180
Showing Columns in a View 6-185
Index 397

Usr Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Usr Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PHAWorks 5

Personal Computer Software

Copyright 1996-2000 by Primatech Inc. All rights reserved.

PHAWorks is a registered trademark of Primatech Inc.

Welcome to PHAWorks 5 for Windows! Were certain that youll find

Heres what youll find in each chapter of the User Guide:

Chapter 1, Getting Started

This chapter provides information about whats new in this version of

Chapter 2, Creating an Initial PHA

Chapter 3, Revalidating and Updating PHA Projects

Chapter 4, PHAWorks Basics

This chapter provides information about basic tasks such as opening or

Chapter 5, PHAWorks Tutorial

This chapter explains how to switch between the Spreadsheet, Datasheet

Chapter 7, Working with Data

Chapter 8, Changing Project Information

This chapter contains information about passwords, project notes and

Chapter 9, Tools and Utilities

Chapter 10, Generating Reports

Use this chapter as a reference when creating project reports.

Appendix A, The PHAWorks Viewer Program

This appendix describes the PHAWorks Viewer program.

This appendix defines PHAWorks terms.

Appendix C, Formal Definitions of Risk and Severity

This appendix provides a technical definition of how risk and severity

Here are the minimum hardware requirements for PHAWorks 5:

This manual uses the following conventions:

Our address is:

PHAWorks 5 is a powerful Process Hazard Analysis (PHA) tool for

Getting Started 1-24

Getting Started 1-25

Changing the program format from a database to a document has af-

Enhancements to Project Configuration

PHAWorks 5 includes a confirmation dialog box that appears when

Getting Started 1-26

Enhancements to Column Configuration

Getting Started 1-27

Enhancements to Column Numbering

Getting Started 1-28

Additional Numbering Enhancements

PHAWorks 5 includes a Revision feature in the Worksheet menu.

Getting Started 1-29

Track Worksheet Changes Features

PHAWorks 5 includes Track Worksheet Changes, Show Worksheet

Worksheet and Project Modifications

Getting Started 1-30

The Project Identification dialog box has been changed to a tabbed

The worksheet appearance and functions have changed as follows:

Getting Started 1-31

A number of changes have been made to the Reports feature:

Getting Started 1-32

A number of changes have been made in the Reports Preview page: 1

Spell Check Enhancements

Several improvements have been made to the spell check capability:

When you open (double-click on) a link in PHAWorks 5, the running

Getting Started 1-33

Improvements have been made to the risk ranking capability:

PHAWorks 5 has multiple toolbars. Having multiple toolbars allows

Getting Started 1-34

The Compress/Expand Project features in File Maintenance in the

The following items have been moved or removed:

Getting Started 1-35

The following menu items have been added:

When you convert projects from PHAWorks 4.1 to PHAWorks 5 (i.e.,